Attachment #96191 for bug #143894




dnl $Id: acinclude.m4,v 1.11 2006/08/25 15:38:28 vadz Exp $
dnl local macro definitions for M's configure.in

dnl package,message,variable,default,helpmessage

  ]
)

dnl M_GCC_OPTION(OPTION, ACTION-IF-SUPPORTED, ACTION-IF-NOT-SUPPORTED)
## libtool.m4 - Configure libtool for the target system. -*-Shell-script-*-
## Copyright (C) 1996-1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
## Gordon Matzigkeit <gord@gnu.ai.mit.edu>, 1996
##
## This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
## it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
## the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
## (at your option) any later version.
##
## This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
## WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
## MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
## General Public License for more details.
##
## You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
## along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
## Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
##
## As a special exception to the GNU General Public License, if you
## distribute this file as part of a program that contains a
## configuration script generated by Autoconf, you may include it under
## the same distribution terms that you use for the rest of that program.

# serial 24 AM_PROG_LIBTOOL
AC_DEFUN([AM_PROG_LIBTOOL],
[AC_REQUIRE([AM_ENABLE_SHARED])dnl
AC_REQUIRE([AM_ENABLE_STATIC])dnl
AC_REQUIRE([AC_CANONICAL_HOST])dnl
AC_REQUIRE([AC_PROG_RANLIB])dnl
AC_REQUIRE([AC_PROG_CC])dnl
AC_REQUIRE([AM_PROG_LD])dnl
AC_REQUIRE([AM_PROG_NM])dnl
AC_REQUIRE([AC_PROG_LN_S])dnl
dnl
dnl Check if gcc supports the given option (fails if compiler is not gcc)
AC_DEFUN([M_GCC_OPTION], [
   AC_REQUIRE([AC_PROG_CC])
   if test "x$GCC" = "xyes"; then
      echo 'void f(){}' >conftest.c
      case "`$CC $1 -c conftest.c 2>&1`" in
         '') ifelse([$2], , :, [$2]) ;;
         *)  ifelse([$3], , :, [$3]) ;;
      esac
      rm -f conftest.*
   else
      ifelse([$3], , :, [$3])
   fi
# libtool support.
case "$host" in
*-*-irix6*)
  # Find out which ABI we are using.
  echo '[#]line __oline__ "configure"' > conftest.$ac_ext
  if AC_TRY_EVAL(ac_compile); then
    case "`/usr/bin/file conftest.o`" in
    *32-bit*)
      LD="${LD-ld} -32"
      ;;
    *N32*)
      LD="${LD-ld} -n32"
      ;;
    *64-bit*)
      LD="${LD-ld} -64"
      ;;
    esac
  fi
  rm -rf conftest*
  ;;

*-*-sco3.2v5*)
  # On SCO OpenServer 5, we need -belf to get full-featured binaries.
  CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -belf"
  ;;
esac

# Actually configure libtool.  ac_aux_dir is where install-sh is found.
CC="$CC" CFLAGS="$CFLAGS" CPPFLAGS="$CPPFLAGS" \
LD="$LD" NM="$NM" RANLIB="$RANLIB" LN_S="$LN_S" \
${CONFIG_SHELL-/bin/sh} $ac_aux_dir/ltconfig \
$libtool_flags --no-verify $ac_aux_dir/ltmain.sh $host \
|| AC_MSG_ERROR([libtool configure failed])
])

# AM_ENABLE_SHARED - implement the --enable-shared flag
# Usage: AM_ENABLE_SHARED[(DEFAULT)]
#   Where DEFAULT is either `yes' or `no'.  If omitted, it defaults to
#   `yes'.
AC_DEFUN([AM_ENABLE_SHARED],
[define([AM_ENABLE_SHARED_DEFAULT], ifelse($1, no, no, yes))dnl
AC_ARG_ENABLE(shared,
changequote(<<, >>)dnl
<<  --enable-shared         build shared libraries [default=>>AM_ENABLE_SHARED_DEFAULT]
changequote([, ])dnl
[  --enable-shared=PKGS    only build shared libraries if the current package
                          appears as an element in the PKGS list],
[p=${PACKAGE-default}
case "$enableval" in
yes) enable_shared=yes ;;
no) enable_shared=no ;;
*)
  enable_shared=no
  # Look at the argument we got.  We use all the common list separators.
  IFS="${IFS= 	}"; ac_save_ifs="$IFS"; IFS="${IFS}:,"
  for pkg in $enableval; do
    if test "X$pkg" = "X$p"; then
      enable_shared=yes
    fi
  done
  IFS="$ac_save_ifs"
  ;;
esac],
enable_shared=AM_ENABLE_SHARED_DEFAULT)dnl
])

# AM_DISABLE_SHARED - set the default shared flag to --disable-shared
AC_DEFUN([AM_DISABLE_SHARED],
[AM_ENABLE_SHARED(no)])

# AM_DISABLE_STATIC - set the default static flag to --disable-static
AC_DEFUN([AM_DISABLE_STATIC],
[AM_ENABLE_STATIC(no)])

# AM_ENABLE_STATIC - implement the --enable-static flag
# Usage: AM_ENABLE_STATIC[(DEFAULT)]
#   Where DEFAULT is either `yes' or `no'.  If omitted, it defaults to
#   `yes'.
AC_DEFUN([AM_ENABLE_STATIC],
[define([AM_ENABLE_STATIC_DEFAULT], ifelse($1, no, no, yes))dnl
AC_ARG_ENABLE(static,
changequote(<<, >>)dnl
<<  --enable-static         build static libraries [default=>>AM_ENABLE_STATIC_DEFAULT]
changequote([, ])dnl
[  --enable-static=PKGS    only build shared libraries if the current package
                          appears as an element in the PKGS list],
[p=${PACKAGE-default}
case "$enableval" in
yes) enable_static=yes ;;
no) enable_static=no ;;
*)
  enable_static=no
  # Look at the argument we got.  We use all the common list separators.
  IFS="${IFS= 	}"; ac_save_ifs="$IFS"; IFS="${IFS}:,"
  for pkg in $enableval; do
    if test "X$pkg" = "X$p"; then
      enable_static=yes
    fi
  done
  IFS="$ac_save_ifs"
  ;;
esac],
enable_static=AM_ENABLE_STATIC_DEFAULT)dnl
])


# AM_PROG_LD - find the path to the GNU or non-GNU linker
AC_DEFUN([AM_PROG_LD],
[AC_ARG_WITH(gnu-ld,
[  --with-gnu-ld           assume the C compiler uses GNU ld [default=no]],
test "$withval" = no || with_gnu_ld=yes, with_gnu_ld=no)
AC_REQUIRE([AC_PROG_CC])
ac_prog=ld
if test "$ac_cv_prog_gcc" = yes; then
  # Check if gcc -print-prog-name=ld gives a path.
  AC_MSG_CHECKING([for ld used by GCC])
  ac_prog=`($CC -print-prog-name=ld) 2>&5`
  case "$ac_prog" in
  # Accept absolute paths.
  /* | [A-Za-z]:\\*)
    test -z "$LD" && LD="$ac_prog"
    ;;
  "")
    # If it fails, then pretend we aren't using GCC.
    ac_prog=ld
    ;;
  *)
    # If it is relative, then search for the first ld in PATH.
    with_gnu_ld=unknown
    ;;
  esac
elif test "$with_gnu_ld" = yes; then
  AC_MSG_CHECKING([for GNU ld])
else
  AC_MSG_CHECKING([for non-GNU ld])
fi
AC_CACHE_VAL(ac_cv_path_LD,
[if test -z "$LD"; then
  IFS="${IFS= 	}"; ac_save_ifs="$IFS"; IFS="${IFS}:"
  for ac_dir in $PATH; do
    test -z "$ac_dir" && ac_dir=.
    if test -f "$ac_dir/$ac_prog"; then
      ac_cv_path_LD="$ac_dir/$ac_prog"
      # Check to see if the program is GNU ld.  I'd rather use --version,
      # but apparently some GNU ld's only accept -v.
      # Break only if it was the GNU/non-GNU ld that we prefer.
      if "$ac_cv_path_LD" -v 2>&1 < /dev/null | egrep '(GNU|with BFD)' > /dev/null; then
	test "$with_gnu_ld" != no && break
      else
        test "$with_gnu_ld" != yes && break
      fi
    fi
  done
  IFS="$ac_save_ifs"
else
  ac_cv_path_LD="$LD" # Let the user override the test with a path.
fi])
LD="$ac_cv_path_LD"
if test -n "$LD"; then
  AC_MSG_RESULT($LD)
else
  AC_MSG_RESULT(no)
fi
test -z "$LD" && AC_MSG_ERROR([no acceptable ld found in \$PATH])
AC_SUBST(LD)
AM_PROG_LD_GNU
])

AC_DEFUN([AM_PROG_LD_GNU],
[AC_CACHE_CHECK([if the linker ($LD) is GNU ld], ac_cv_prog_gnu_ld,
[# I'd rather use --version here, but apparently some GNU ld's only accept -v.
if $LD -v 2>&1 </dev/null | egrep '(GNU|with BFD)' 1>&5; then
  ac_cv_prog_gnu_ld=yes
else
  ac_cv_prog_gnu_ld=no
fi])
])

# AM_PROG_NM - find the path to a BSD-compatible name lister
AC_DEFUN([AM_PROG_NM],
[AC_MSG_CHECKING([for BSD-compatible nm])
AC_CACHE_VAL(ac_cv_path_NM,
[case "$NM" in
/* | [A-Za-z]:\\*)
  ac_cv_path_NM="$NM" # Let the user override the test with a path.
  ;;
*)
  IFS="${IFS= 	}"; ac_save_ifs="$IFS"; IFS="${IFS}:"
  for ac_dir in /usr/ucb /usr/ccs/bin $PATH /bin; do
    test -z "$ac_dir" && ac_dir=.
    if test -f $ac_dir/nm; then
      # Check to see if the nm accepts a BSD-compat flag.
      # Adding the `sed 1q' prevents false positives on HP-UX, which says:
      #   nm: unknown option "B" ignored
      if ($ac_dir/nm -B /dev/null 2>&1 | sed '1q'; exit 0) | egrep /dev/null >/dev/null; then
        ac_cv_path_NM="$ac_dir/nm -B"
      elif ($ac_dir/nm -p /dev/null 2>&1 | sed '1q'; exit 0) | egrep /dev/null >/dev/null; then
        ac_cv_path_NM="$ac_dir/nm -p"
      else
        ac_cv_path_NM="$ac_dir/nm"
      fi
      break
    fi
  done
  IFS="$ac_save_ifs"
  test -z "$ac_cv_path_NM" && ac_cv_path_NM=nm
  ;;
esac])
NM="$ac_cv_path_NM"
AC_MSG_RESULT([$NM])
AC_SUBST(NM)
])




ac_help="$ac_help
  --disable-optimize      disable optimization (automatic if debugging)"
ac_help="$ac_help
  --with-wxdebug          use debug wxWidgets libraries"
ac_help="$ac_help
  --with-dmalloc          use dmalloc (http://dmalloc.com/) for debugging"
ac_help="$ac_help

fi


# From configure.in Id: configure.in,v 1.318 2006/08/25 15:39:12 vadz Exp 

rm -f conftestdata
if ln -s X conftestdata 2>/dev/null

			if test -f /etc/redhat-release -a ! grep "7\.0" /etc/redhat-release
			then workarroundmsg="
	It seems you are using Red Hat Linux 7.0. A workaround for your
	problem is to use egcs to compile wxWidgets and Mahogany:
		- at your bash prompt type:
			export CC=egcs
			export CXX=egcs++
		- reconfigure and rebuild wxWidgets and Mahogany
		(don't forget to remove the config.cache files
		located in the source code directories of
		wxWidgets and Mahogany before reconfiguring them."
			else workarroundmsg=""
			fi
			{ echo "configure: error: Sorry, it seems that you have a buggy gcc version which is


if test "$wxOK" != 1; then
   { echo "configure: error: 
	   Mahogany requires wxWidgets to be installed on your system
	   but wx-config script couldn't be found.

	   Please check that wx-config is in PATH, the directory
	   where wxWidgets libraries are installed (returned by
	   'wx-config --libs' command) is in LD_LIBRARY_PATH or
	   equivalent variable and wxWidgets version is 2.5.2 or above.
   " 1>&2; exit 1; }
fi


fi

case "$USE_THREADS" in 1)
	echo $ac_n "checking if wxWidgets was compiled with threads""... $ac_c" 1>&6
echo "configure:4564: checking if wxWidgets was compiled with threads" >&5
if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'m_cv_wx_threads'+set}'`\" = set"; then
  echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6
else


IMAP_CFLAGS="$CFLAGS"
IMAP_CPPFLAGS="$IMAP_CPPFLAGS $CPPFLAGS"
echo $ac_n "checking whether $CC accepts -Wno-pointer-sign""... $ac_c" 1>&6
echo "configure:5329: checking whether $CC accepts -Wno-pointer-sign" >&5
if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'m_cv_cc_no_warn_ptr_sign'+set}'`\" = set"; then
  echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6
else
  
   
   if test "x$GCC" = "xyes"; then
      echo 'void f(){}' >conftest.c
      case "`$CC -Wno-pointer-sign -c conftest.c 2>&1`" in
         '') m_cv_cc_no_warn_ptr_sign="yes" ;;
         *)  m_cv_cc_no_warn_ptr_sign="no" ;;
      esac
      rm -f conftest.*
   else
      m_cv_cc_no_warn_ptr_sign="no"
   fi


fi

echo "$ac_t""$m_cv_cc_no_warn_ptr_sign" 1>&6
if test $m_cv_cc_no_warn_ptr_sign = "yes"; then
    IMAP_CPPFLAGS="$IMAP_CPPFLAGS -Wno-pointer-sign"
fi



if test "x$DEPFLAGS" != "x"; then
            if test "x$GXX" != "xyes"; then
	echo $ac_n "checking whether ${CXX} accepts ${DEPFLAGS}""... $ac_c" 1>&6
echo "configure:5406: checking whether ${CXX} accepts ${DEPFLAGS}" >&5
if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'m_cv_cxx_depflags'+set}'`\" = set"; then
  echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6
else

    if test "x$DEPFLAGS" != "x"; then
	if test "x$GCC" != "xyes"; then
	    echo $ac_n "checking whether ${CC} accepts ${DEPFLAGS}""... $ac_c" 1>&6
echo "configure:5429: checking whether ${CC} accepts ${DEPFLAGS}" >&5
if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'m_cv_c_depflags'+set}'`\" = set"; then
  echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6
else

echo
echo "Configured Mahogany ${M_VERSION_MAJOR}.${M_VERSION_MINOR}.${M_VERSION_RELEASE} for ${host}."
echo ""
echo "	wxWidgets port used:			${WX_NAME} ${WX_VERSION}"
echo "	Debug mode:				${debug_option}"
echo "	SSL support:				${ssl_option}"
echo "	Modules support:			${m_cv_USE_MODULES}"




dnl Process this file with autoconf to produce a configure script.

AC_INIT(configure.in)
AC_REVISION([$Id: configure.in,v 1.319 2006/08/31 23:58:25 vadz Exp $])

rm -f conftestdata
if ln -s X conftestdata 2>/dev/null

dnl imap
IMAP_CFLAGS="$CFLAGS"
IMAP_CPPFLAGS="$IMAP_CPPFLAGS $CPPFLAGS"
dnl there are too many warnings in c-client sources which its author
dnl refuses to fix, suppress them when using gcc4
AC_CACHE_CHECK([whether $CC accepts -Wno-pointer-sign],
    m_cv_cc_no_warn_ptr_sign,
    [M_GCC_OPTION(-Wno-pointer-sign,
	m_cv_cc_no_warn_ptr_sign="yes",
	m_cv_cc_no_warn_ptr_sign="no")]
)
if test $m_cv_cc_no_warn_ptr_sign = "yes"; then
    IMAP_CPPFLAGS="$IMAP_CPPFLAGS -Wno-pointer-sign"
fi
AC_SUBST(IMAP_CPPFLAGS)




<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.0 Transitional//EN">

<!--Converted with LaTeX2HTML 2002-2-1 (1.71)
original version by:  Nikos Drakos, CBLU, University of Leeds
* revised and updated by:  Marcus Hennecke, Ross Moore, Herb Swan
* with significant contributions from:
  Jens Lippmann, Marek Rouchal, Martin Wilck and others -->
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<TITLE>Mahogany User Manual
Version 0.67 ``Constance''</TITLE>
<META NAME="description" CONTENT="Mahogany User Manual
Version 0.67 ``Constance''">
<META NAME="keywords" CONTENT="Manual">
<META NAME="resource-type" CONTENT="document">
<META NAME="distribution" CONTENT="global">

<META NAME="Generator" CONTENT="LaTeX2HTML v2002-2-1">
<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Style-Type" CONTENT="text/css">

<LINK REL="STYLESHEET" HREF="Manual.css">

</HEAD>

<BODY >

<P>




<P>

<P>
<H1 ALIGN="CENTER"><BIG CLASS="XXLARGE"><SPAN  CLASS="textsl">Mahogany User Manual</SPAN></BIG>
<BR><BIG CLASS="XLARGE">Version 0.67 ``Constance''</BIG></H1>
<DIV CLASS="author_info">

<P ALIGN="CENTER"><STRONG>Copyright 1997-2006 by The Mahogany Development Team</STRONG></P>
</DIV>

<P>
<BR>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00100000000000000000">
Contents</A>
</H2>
<!--Table of Contents-->

<UL CLASS="TofC">
<LI><A NAME="tex2html174"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00200000000000000000">Using Mahogany </A>
<UL>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html175"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00210000000000000000">Release Notes</A>
<UL>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html176"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00211000000000000000">Changes against the previous versions</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html177"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00212000000000000000">Known bugs</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html178"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00213000000000000000">TODO, features to implement</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html179"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00214000000000000000">Help Needed</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html180"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00215000000000000000">Copyright</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html181"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00216000000000000000">The Mahogany ``Artistic License''</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html182"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00217000000000000000">The License Dialog</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html183"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00218000000000000000">Additional Credits</A>
</UL>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html184"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00220000000000000000">Introduction / Tutorial</A>
<UL>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html185"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00221000000000000000">Getting started</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html186"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00222000000000000000">The main window</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html187"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00223000000000000000">How to configure POP and IMAP folders?</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html188"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00224000000000000000">How to set up your mail accounts</A>
</UL>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html189"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00230000000000000000">Setting up Mahogany, its configuration files</A>
<UL>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html190"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00231000000000000000">Mahogany command line options</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html191"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00232000000000000000">User configuration files (Unix only)</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html192"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00233000000000000000">Registry (Windows only)</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html193"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00234000000000000000">Using multiple configuration sources</A>
</UL>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html194"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00240000000000000000">The User Interface</A>
<UL>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html195"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00241000000000000000">The Main Window</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html196"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00242000000000000000">The Folder Tree</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html197"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00243000000000000000">Create New Folder Dialog</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html198"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00244000000000000000">Folder Views</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html199"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00245000000000000000">Migrating from another mail client</A>
</UL>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html200"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00250000000000000000">Reading Mail</A>
<UL>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html201"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00251000000000000000">The INBOX Folder</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html202"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00252000000000000000">The ``New Mail'' Folder</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html203"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00253000000000000000">Other Folders</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html204"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00254000000000000000">Accessing Mail Remotely</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html205"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00255000000000000000">Searching for Messages</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html206"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00256000000000000000">Filters</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html207"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00257000000000000000">Spam filtering</A>
</UL>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html208"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00260000000000000000">Sending Mail</A>
<UL>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html209"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00261000000000000000">To: CC: and BCC: Settings</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html210"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00262000000000000000">Key Bindings in the Message Editor</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html211"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00263000000000000000">Using the address book</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html212"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00264000000000000000">The Mail Composition Window</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html213"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00265000000000000000">The News Article Composition Window</A>
</UL>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html214"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00270000000000000000">Message Templates</A>
<UL>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html215"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00271000000000000000">What are they?</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html216"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00272000000000000000">Templates syntax</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html217"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00273000000000000000">Template variables</A>
</UL>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html218"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00280000000000000000">Understanding program options</A>
<UL>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html219"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00281000000000000000">Hierarchical options organization</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html220"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00282000000000000000">Automatically remembered options</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html221"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00283000000000000000">Other options</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html222"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00284000000000000000">Remote configuration synchronisation</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html223"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00285000000000000000">Some Other Dialogs You May Encounter</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html224"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00286000000000000000">Mahogany Plugin Modules</A>
</UL>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html225"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00290000000000000000">The Address Database</A>
<UL>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html226"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00291000000000000000">The native Address Book </A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html227"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00292000000000000000">The Address Book Editor</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html228"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00293000000000000000">Support for BBDB Address Books</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html229"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00294000000000000000">One Address per Line File Address Books</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html230"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00295000000000000000">Support for Palm Address Books</A>
</UL>
</UL>
<BR>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html231"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00300000000000000000">Scripting and Extending Mahogany</A>
<UL>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html232"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00310000000000000000">Python Scripting</A>
<UL>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html233"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00311000000000000000">Introduction</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html234"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00312000000000000000">Initialisation </A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html235"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00313000000000000000">Using Python with Filters</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html236"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00314000000000000000">Callback Functions (Hooks)</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html237"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00315000000000000000">Namespaces</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html238"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00316000000000000000">List of Callbacks</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html239"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00317000000000000000">Supported Classes</A>
</UL>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html240"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00320000000000000000">Plugins</A>
<UL>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html241"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00321000000000000000">Introduction</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html242"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00322000000000000000">The Filters Module</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html243"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00323000000000000000">The PalmOS Module</A>
</UL>
</UL>
<BR>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html244"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00400000000000000000">Getting Help and Support</A>
<UL>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html245"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00410000000000000000">Troubleshooting</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html246"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00420000000000000000">WWW Support</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html247"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00430000000000000000">Mailing Lists</A>
</UL>
<BR>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html248"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00500000000000000000">Advanced Usage</A>
<UL>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html249"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00510000000000000000">Compiling Mahogany from source</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html250"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00520000000000000000">Using Mahogany more efficiently</A>
<UL>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html251"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00521000000000000000">Speeding up Mahogany startup</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html252"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00522000000000000000">Limiting Amount of Data Transferred</A>
</UL>
</UL>
<BR>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html253"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00600000000000000000">FAQ - Frequently Asked Questions</A>
<UL>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html254"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00610000000000000000">Installation Problems</A>
<UL>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html255"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00611000000000000000">All Mahogany icons show a question mark</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html256"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00612000000000000000">How do I unpack the compressed files?</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html257"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00613000000000000000">Compiling aborts with errors</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html258"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00614000000000000000">Mahogany fails to find wxWidgets, configure fails</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html259"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00615000000000000000">SSL does not work</A>
</UL>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html260"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00620000000000000000">Other Problems / Questions</A>
<UL>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html261"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00621000000000000000">The Preferences Dialog does not show up properly</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html262"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00622000000000000000">How to use Mahogany with fetchmail/procmail?</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html263"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00623000000000000000">Does Mahogany have group aliases?</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html264"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00624000000000000000">How can I set up POP3/IMAP access?</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html265"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00625000000000000000">How can I set up IMAP access?</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html266"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00626000000000000000">Can I have multiple POP3 or IMAP accounts?</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html267"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00627000000000000000">Can I have multiple identities?</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html268"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00628000000000000000">Can I run Mahogany as root?</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html269"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION00629000000000000000">How can I set which language to use?</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html270"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION006210000000000000000">How can I delete messages?</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html271"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION006211000000000000000">How can I forward a message with attachments?</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html272"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION006212000000000000000">How can I customize the position of folders in the tree?</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html273"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION006213000000000000000">How can I ``leave messages on server'' (POP3)?</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html274"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION006214000000000000000">Can I have ``subfolders'' of File type (mbox) folders?</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html275"
  HREF="Manual.html#SECTION006215000000000000000">Can I ``Follow-up'' to the message?</A>
</UL></UL></UL>
<!--End of Table of Contents-->

<P>

<H1><A NAME="SECTION00200000000000000000">
Using Mahogany </A>
</H1>

<P>

<H1><A NAME="SECTION00210000000000000000">
Release Notes</A>
</H1>

<P>
Welcome to the new Mahogany release! If you haven't installed the
program yet, you probably want to start by doing it. Please check
if we don't have prebuilt binaries for your platform (currently we
only provide binaries for Linux and Win32). If not, you'll have to
build it from the sources: please refer to the README file for the
compilation instructions. Mahogany should generally work on any modern
Unix flavour but, of course, you can always contact us if you have
any problems with building it.

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00211000000000000000">
Changes against the previous versions</A>
</H2>

<P>
All sections here except the first one present only historical interest, please
skip them unless you're updating from a very old version of Mahogany.

<P>

<H3><A NAME="SECTION00211100000000000000">
0.67 against 0.66</A>
</H3>

<P>

<UL>
<LI>New integrated statistical spam filter (DSPAM)
</LI>
<LI>Better support for sharing preferences between multiple installations
         (see <A HREF="#multiconfigsources"><IMG  ALIGN="BOTTOM" BORDER="1" ALT="[*]" SRC="crossref.png"></A>)
</LI>
<LI>Folders can now be dragged in the folder tree to reorder them. It is
         also possible to drag and drop messages and files from the file
         manager to the composer window to attach them.
</LI>
<LI>Mahogany can now select the viewer best suited for the contents of the
         current message, e.g. you can use text viewer by default but the
         program can be configured to switch to a graphical one for the
         messages with embedded images. It also now displays correctly messages
         with embedded images.
</LI>
<LI>New <TT>-import</TT> command line option to simplify sharing
         of Mahogany options between different installations
</LI>
<LI>Options with non default values are now highlighted in the
         preferences dialog (see <A HREF="#optionshighlight"><IMG  ALIGN="BOTTOM" BORDER="1" ALT="[*]" SRC="crossref.png"></A>)
</LI>
<LI>New <TT>nop()</TT> (stop filter processing) filter action added
</LI>
<LI>The "Set From from To" option (<A HREF="#IdentityPage"><IMG  ALIGN="BOTTOM" BORDER="1" ALT="[*]" SRC="crossref.png"></A>) is more useful
</LI>
<LI>When replying to PGP-encrypted messages, clear text is used for
         replies and not the original message.
</LI>
<LI>New ``Where is filter'' command (<A HREF="#filterdialogs"><IMG  ALIGN="BOTTOM" BORDER="1" ALT="[*]" SRC="crossref.png"></A>)
</LI>
<LI>Mahogany will warn you if you start replying to the same message a
         second time now.
</LI>
<LI>Detect forgotten attachments before sending the message.
</LI>
</UL>

<P>
By far the main new feature in this version is the integration of DSPAM
According to http://www.nuclearelephant.com/projects/dspam/:

<P>
<BLOCKQUOTE>
DSPAM (as in De-Spam) is an extremely scalable, open-source statistical
anti-spam filter. While most commercial solutions only provide a mere 95%
accuracy (1 error in 20), a majority of DSPAM users frequently see between
99.95% (1 error in 2000) all the way up to 99.991% (2 errors in 22,786).

</BLOCKQUOTE>

<P>
Please see <A HREF="#DSPAM"><IMG  ALIGN="BOTTOM" BORDER="1" ALT="[*]" SRC="crossref.png"></A> section for the description of how to configure and use
DSPAM.

<P>

<H3><A NAME="SECTION00211200000000000000">
0.66 against 0.65</A>
</H3>

<P>
The most noticeable new feature is the new composer. Unfortunately, it is less
powerful than the old one as the new one is text-only and not rich text but it
is also significantly less buggy and simpler to use. Another big internal
change is that the built in Python interpreter now works again and you can use
it to write filter functions and do other nifty things (see section
<A HREF="#python"><IMG  ALIGN="BOTTOM" BORDER="1" ALT="[*]" SRC="crossref.png"></A>). Finally, we now have a working version for Mac OS X.

<P>
Other than that, the focus of the new release is yet again more bug fixing
than adding new features. As usual, some of them were still added:

<UL>
<LI>Quick search commands in the folder view (see <A HREF="#keybindings"><IMG  ALIGN="BOTTOM" BORDER="1" ALT="[*]" SRC="crossref.png"></A> and
      <A HREF="#searching"><IMG  ALIGN="BOTTOM" BORDER="1" ALT="[*]" SRC="crossref.png"></A>)
</LI>
<LI>Text viewer now supports printing
</LI>
<LI>Support for <TT>X-Attribution</TT> header
</LI>
<LI>Better support for UTF-7/8 encoded headers
</LI>
<LI>``Paste quoted'' command added
</LI>
<LI>New command to select all text in the viewer added
</LI>
<LI>New command to toggle the ``answered'' message flag added
</LI>
<LI>New <TT>-userdir</TT> command line option
</LI>
<LI><TT>isfromme()</TT> (was message sent by myself?) filter test added
</LI>
</UL>

<P>

<H3><A NAME="SECTION00211300000000000000">
0.65 against 0.64</A>
</H3>

<P>
First of all, too many bugs to be mentioned here were fixed. During more than a
year since the last release we mainly concentrated on making Mahogany more
stable and faster (or at least less slow) rather than on adding new features.

<P>
Yet, inevitably, some of them still crept in and here is an incomplete list:

<UL>
<LI>It is now possible to postpone messages being composed and later resume
      writing them by opening them in ``Drafts'' folder
</LI>
<LI>Mahogany tries to save messages being composed in case of crash or
      interrupt
</LI>
<LI>TLS (as in STARTTLS) is now supported for all protocols (SMTP,
      IMAP and POP)
</LI>
<LI>Preliminary and limited support for PGP added: GNU Privacy Guard
      may be used for decoding the PGP-encoded message and checking PGP
      signatures.
</LI>
<LI>Message viewer now recognizes <TT>*bold*</TT> and <TT>_italic_</TT> markup,
      can decode messages encoded in ROT13 and highlights signatures in a
      different colour. More URLs are found and highlighted and detecting them
      is much faster now.
</LI>
<LI>SMTP authentication now can be tweaked to work even with seriously
      broken servers such as qmail and exim 3
</LI>
<LI>Mahogany now comes with many built-in spam tests which can be tweaked
      to be more or less strict. It isn't comparable to Spam Assasin yet, but
      it is better than nothing.
</LI>
<LI>Composer interface has been changed, hopefully for the better, once again
</LI>
<LI>It is now possible to control a remote instance of Mahogany using the
      command line arguments (see <A HREF="#cmdlineargs"><IMG  ALIGN="BOTTOM" BORDER="1" ALT="[*]" SRC="crossref.png"></A>) and also to directly open
      the composer from the command line.
</LI>
<LI>``Bounce'' (also known as ``Redirect'') command was added as well as
      ``Resend message'' one.
</LI>
<LI>Search results are now shown in a so called virtual folder which makes
      working with them much more convenient and it is now also possible to
      search in many folders at once.
</LI>
<LI>More new commands in no special order: ``Move folder'', ``Follow up to
      newsgroup'', ``Go to message'' (by number), ``Preview'' in composer
</LI>
<LI>Message viewer supports UTF-7 and UTF-8.
</LI>
<LI>Raw text view dialog now has a find button.
</LI>
<LI>It is now possible to use config files instead of the registry under
      Windows too.
</LI>
</UL>

<P>
Finally not really a new feature but an important achievement in our struggle
for world domination: Mahogany now runs under Mac OS X as well! Note that
Mahogany is a real native (Carbon) application and doesn't require GTK+ or X11.

<P>

<H3><A NAME="SECTION00211400000000000000">
0.64 against 0.63</A>
</H3>

<P>
This time the most important changes have happened to the already
existing features many of which were dramatically improved. Support
for both IMAP4 and POP3 has got better, many UI improvements were done
and too many bugs to mention here were fixed.

<P>
The main change without doubt is the complete reorganisation of the
program internals which now allows us to only download the headers
shown on the screen from server instead of getting all of them. This
means that the time needed to open a folder is now almost independent
of the folder size and Mahogany can be used without troubles with
folders containing <SPAN CLASS="MATH"><IMG
 WIDTH="51" HEIGHT="20" ALIGN="BOTTOM" BORDER="0"
 SRC="img1.png"
 ALT="$50000$"></SPAN> messages (and maybe more - but this wasn't
tested yet).

<P>
But what would be a new release without some new features? So here
they are:

<P>

<UL>
<LI>Added optional support for viewing and printing the HTML messages.
Also added an optional text-only viewer and a viewer bar to quickly
change the current viewer.
</LI>
<LI>Added possibility to monitor a folder (or server) in the background
just updading the number of messages in it but without actually downloading
them.
</LI>
<LI>IMAP server-side sorting and threading can now be used if available.
It is also possible to sort and thread messages simultaneously. Both
are now also done much more efficiently and more correctly.
</LI>
<LI>Mahogany now remembers the flags for the POP3 servers and new mail
detection for them works much more reliably which now makes Mahogany
a much better POP3 client (provided your server supports UIDL POP
command). POP3 code also tries to be faster by optionally using TOP
instead of downloading the entire messages.
</LI>
<LI>Support for List-Post header and the possibility to configure the
program to automatically reply to the mailing list only.
</LI>
<LI>Added rename and copy buttons to the filter editing dialog.
</LI>
<LI>Added &#34;Open as readonly&#34; command - this can be significantly
faster than &#34;Open&#34; for the local folders and also
works for the read only files.
</LI>
<LI>Added a command to permanently delete messages instead of moving them
to the Trash folder - useful for dealing with spam.
</LI>
<LI>Filters were sped up even more. They also show a nicer progress dialog
now.
</LI>
<LI>Added commands to manually update the status of one or all folders.
</LI>
<LI>Also added commands to mark messages as read or unread.
</LI>
</UL>
Some of the notable UI improvements are:

<P>

<UL>
<LI>Quoting the original text when replying is now optional, you can also
choose to include only the text selected in the viewer in the reply.
</LI>
<LI>Progress dialogs are shown while Mahogany is performing some long
operations. The existing progress dialogs shown while retrieving the
message headers now show the details of the messages being retrieved.
</LI>
<LI>Password handling in case they are not stored in the config file has
been improved - Mahogany can now remember them for this session only
instead of keeping prompting for them.
</LI>
<LI>Clicking on the header in the folder view window gives fast access
to the sorting/threading menu with many useful items.
</LI>
<LI>Scrolling beyond the end of the current messages (optionally) selects
the next unread message or folder.
</LI>
<LI>It is possible to rename the folder in the tree and the underlying
folder file or mailbox independently of each other.
</LI>
</UL>
The Win32 version has now some more of the possibilities of the Unix
one:

<P>

<UL>
<LI>SSL support is now available under Windows.
</LI>
<LI>Mahogany can play a sound on receiving a new mail (optionally, of
course).
</LI>
</UL>

<P>

<H3><A NAME="SECTION00211500000000000000">
0.63 against 0.62</A>
</H3>

<P>
Again, most of the effort went into optimizing the program for speed.
Filtering and moving mail messages on IMAP servers is now an order
of magnitude faster and startup time has been reduced too (especially
under Windows). Several fatal bugs which had unfortunately crept into
Win32 release were fixed as well.

<P>
The new features this time include

<P>

<UL>
<LI>Showing the total number and the number of unread messages directly
in the folder tree
</LI>
<LI>New so-called unattended, or away, mode in which all new mail notifications
and any interactive dialogs are temporarily suppressed
</LI>
<LI>A few new commands such as &#34;Clear folder&#34; to delete
all messages in a folder without even opening it (handy for emptying
the trash folder) and &#34;Close&#34; and &#34;Close
all&#34; folder(s).
</LI>
</UL>
There are several more minor improvements as well:

<P>

<UL>
<LI>New URL popup menu in the message viewer and &#34;Open URL in
new browser window&#34; option
</LI>
<LI>``Open with...'' command in attachment context menu
</LI>
<LI>A new option to automatically select the units for message size (KB/MB)
</LI>
<LI>Python 2.x is now supported and not only 1.5 (Unix)
</LI>
</UL>
Some of non fatal but annoying bugs fixed in this release are:

<P>

<UL>
<LI>Fixed server side searching (IMAP only)
</LI>
<LI>Fixed text highlighting when selecting text in the viewer
</LI>
<LI>Renaming of the folders in the tree fixed once again
</LI>
</UL>

<P>

<H3><A NAME="SECTION00211600000000000000">
0.62 against 0.61</A>
</H3>

<P>
The main changes in this release concern the Mahogany internals: the
stability and efficiency have been both greatly improved, in particular
it is believed that all fatal crashes using IMAP servers are now gone.
Deleting, expunging and changing the status of the messages is now
much faster, especially for the folders with a lot of messages. Of
course, there are also several new features:

<P>

<UL>
<LI>Order of the folders in the folder tree is customizable, the system
folders appear at the top (and not scattered through the tree in alphabetical
order)
</LI>
<LI>Support for flagging the messages was added, the folders containing
flagged messages are shown in a different colour in the folder tree
</LI>
<LI>All folders opened the last time can be remembered and reopened during
the next run
</LI>
<LI><TT>TEXT/PLAIN</TT> attachments can now be optionally shown inline
</LI>
<LI>hard limit on number of retrieved messages was added (see <A HREF="#limitdatatransfer"><IMG  ALIGN="BOTTOM" BORDER="1" ALT="[*]" SRC="crossref.png"></A>)
</LI>
</UL>
Many bugs have been fixed:

<P>

<UL>
<LI>sending mail with local MTA (sendmail) respects BCC settings
</LI>
<LI>temporary files with mail messages are not created world readable
any more
</LI>
<LI>language autodetection fixed
</LI>
<LI>messages with embedded MIME attachments are shown correctly
</LI>
<LI>server side searching on IMAP servers works
</LI>
<LI>renaming folders was fixed
</LI>
<LI>crashes when: viewing messages with incorrect date, deleting some
folders and some others were fixed
</LI>
</UL>
And a few improvements too:

<P>

<UL>
<LI>better UI for the filters dialogs
</LI>
<LI>messages can now also be sorted by status and by size
</LI>
<LI>a hard limit on number of the messages retrieved can be set
</LI>
</UL>

<P>

<H3><A NAME="SECTION00211700000000000000">
0.61 against 0.60 </A>
</H3>

<P>
Note: the version 0.61 wasn't officially released

<P>
A couple of new features, most importantly:

<P>

<UL>
<LI>Possibility to save (to the address book) all addresses from a message
appearinganywhere in the headers.
</LI>
<LI>It is now possible to import all folder files in MBOX (Unix) format
using <TT>"Folder|Import folder tree..."</TT> command (see <A HREF="#Import"><IMG  ALIGN="BOTTOM" BORDER="1" ALT="[*]" SRC="crossref.png"></A>)
</LI>
</UL>

<P>

<H3><A NAME="SECTION00211800000000000000">
0.60 against 0.50</A>
</H3>

<P>
Most importantly, all known major bugs in 0.5 have been fixed in this
release. We still have some minor buglets and lots of wishes and enhancements
on our list, but all serious bugs should be gone now. A couple of
new features have been added:

<P>

<UL>
<LI>fixes to all serious bugs from version 0.50
</LI>
<LI>significantly improved IMAP support: it is now possible to subscribe
to all folders on an IMAP server with a single click or to manually
select them from a dialog; Mahogany also uses server side message
functions when possible resulting in huge performance improvement
</LI>
<LI>new, improved filtering system (warning: old filters won't work any
more, contact us if this is really a serious problem for you)
</LI>
<LI>charset and encoding support for message contents and headers (including
autodetecting the charset of incoming messages and setting it for
the outgoing ones)
</LI>
<LI>mail can be sent using local MTA (sendmail) in addition to SMTP
</LI>
<LI>import of settings and folder collections from Pine and XFMail, vCard
support (import/export from addess book, attach to messages)
</LI>
<LI>drag and drop for message copying and moving - &#34;Quick Move&#34;
and &#34;Quick Filter&#34; functions
</LI>
<LI>folders now can (finally) be renamed
</LI>
<LI>quoted text highlighting in the message viewer!
</LI>
<LI>sort the messages display by simply clicking on the corresponding
column, the sorting dialog also has been improved
</LI>
<LI>folders with new/recent messages are highlighted in the folder tree
</LI>
<LI>it is possible (although still discouraged) to run Mahogany as root
</LI>
<LI>passwords in the config file are encrypted using TwoFish algorithm
</LI>
<LI>option to always use external editor by default
</LI>
<LI>messages from oneself are optionally marked as such
</LI>
<LI>support for password protected SMTP and NNTP servers
</LI>
<LI>more verbose error reporting and detection
</LI>
<LI>OpenSSL loaded dynamically if available
</LI>
<LI>PalmOS module supports AvantGo/MAL synchronisation
</LI>
<LI>templates now may be used for replying/forwarding as well
</LI>
<LI>many other various fixes
</LI>
</UL>
<SPAN  CLASS="textbf">New experimental features include:</SPAN>

<P>

<UL>
<LI>supporting multiple-identities and easy switching between them
</LI>
<LI>support of storing configuration settings on an IMAP server allowing
to share them between different machines/accounts
</LI>
</UL>
<SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Known bugs:</SPAN>

<P>

<UL>
<LI>There are always some, listed on our bugtracker at http://mahogany.sourceforge.net/bugz/
and we are working on them.
</LI>
<LI>Version 0.60 suffers from a minor printing bug leading to some overlap
between strings sometimes, which is due to a bug in wxWidgets which
will hopefully be fixed fairly soon.
</LI>
</UL>

<P>

<H3><A NAME="SECTION00211900000000000000">
0.5 against 0.23a</A>
</H3>

<P>
This release has long been delayed, mainly due to us waiting for changes
in wxWidgets to be completed. As we introduced new features in the
meantime, those introduced new delays, and so on. It has been more
than half a year since the last release, so changes are major. We
hope to stick to a much faster cycle of minor update releases for
the future. The main new features are:

<P>

<UL>
<LI>Proper support for MH folders.
</LI>
<LI>Browsing and subscription management for IMAP and NNTP servers.
</LI>
<LI>A plugin module system has been created which allows to dynamically
load expansion modules. Existing modules (statically linked in this
release, but dynamically linkable) include a filtering language and
PalmOS support. For the future, a calendar/timeplanner plugin is planned.
</LI>
<LI>Configurable filtering rules have been added.
</LI>
<LI>Message threading and configurable sort order is supported.
</LI>
<LI>An HTML-based help browser has been added.
</LI>
<LI>Configurable date format.
</LI>
<LI>Handling of dial-up networking and detection of connection status.
</LI>
<LI>Optional user of a Trash folder.
</LI>
<LI>Wizard-dialogs and ``tip of the day'' dialogs added to make
Mahogany easier to use.
</LI>
<LI>Optional SSL support can be compiled in (not activated by default
due to US export restrictions), allowing secure access to mail and
news servers.
</LI>
<LI>PalmOS handheld connectivity: synchronise e-mails with your PalmOS
handheld computer and use its addressbook within Mahogany. Also, backup,
restore and install databases of your handheld.
</LI>
<LI>Bug fixes in nearly all parts of the code. Mahogany should suffer
much less from crashes than earlier versions. The message editor behaves
better and is faster.
</LI>
<LI>Minor GUI improvements like keyboard bindings and nicer icons. Support
for KDE and GNOME filetype icons.
</LI>
</UL>

<P>

<H3><A NAME="SECTION002111000000000000000">
0.23a against 0.22a</A>
</H3>

<P>
The main news is, of course, the long-waited for availability of Win32
version. Also:

<P>

<UL>
<LI>Several bugs in message composer (including a few fatal ones) were
fixed. Only minor problems still persist.
</LI>
<LI>Selections support (copy, cut, paste) in message composer and viewer.
</LI>
<LI>The <TT>[Apply]</TT>and<TT>[Cancel]</TT>buttons in the options
and folder properties dialogs (mostly) work now.
</LI>
<LI>Several minor bug fixes and improvements, including a massive speedup
in the update of folder listings over slow connections.
</LI>
<LI>Printing no longer has overlap between pages.
</LI>
<LI>Folders can be kept open all the time to speed up access to them,
very useful for ``SentMail'' folder.
</LI>
<LI>Better behaved, asks before removing all mail from spool.
</LI>
<LI>Configurable templates for message composition and replies.
</LI>
<LI>Message boxes now have icons in them.
</LI>
<LI>Searching in mail folders.
</LI>
<LI>And, of course, updated translations and documentation updates.
</LI>
</UL>
We have also made good progress on the filtering code, PGP/GPG support,
multi-threading support and support for loadable external modules,
but these features are not complete yet and disabled in the release.
Expect them to appear in the next releases.

<P>

<H3><A NAME="SECTION002111100000000000000">
0.22a against 0.21a</A>
</H3>

<P>
Release 0.22a is mainly a bugfix release against 0.21a.

<P>

<UL>
<LI>All know (crash-inducing) bugs fixed.
</LI>
<LI>Message editor/viewer improvements, adding clipboard support and selections.
</LI>
<LI>wxGTK layout bug fixes - German, French, Spanish translations
</LI>
<LI>Text-search in messages
</LI>
<LI>Several minor usability fixes, sub-folder support fixed.
</LI>
<LI>Addressbook fixes
</LI>
<LI>TCP timeouts configurable
</LI>
<LI>Support for setting the Reply-To: header from To: field in message
replies.
</LI>
</UL>

<P>

<H3><A NAME="SECTION002111200000000000000">
0.10a to 0.21a</A>
</H3>

<P>
First, there are some user-visible changes against the latest version,
most notably the much improved message editor. This is still work
in progress and the next release should add the sorely missed cut
and paste support which only recently became functional in the underlying
wxGTK toolkit. Also, configurability has been much extended. For the
first time, Mahogany now defaults to collecting all mail from the
system's INBOX (whatever that is) to a central ``New Mail''
folder. It can easily be set up to watch any number of different mail
accounts or newsgroups and collect mail from them.

<P>
This release got a bit delayed because we decided to finish some long
planned changes under the hood, mainly a complete rewrite of the internal
configuration system which now provides the inheriting configuration
settings we had planned, something that will become obvious in the
next release when full GUI support for it will be added. Also, we
seriously improved the mailfolder handling code to reliably handle
all kinds of error conditions, such as modified or disappearing mailboxes
or terminated connections and recover from them safely. Also, Mahogany
now has full working support for IMAP, NNTP and newsspools.

<P>
Apart from this there were many minor fixes and changes, both GUI
and mail code, documented in detail at the end of the TODO file.

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00212000000000000000">
Known bugs</A>
</H2>

<P>

<UL>
<LI>Newsspool support will not work with newsgroups not listed in the
``active'' file and is little configurable.
</LI>
<LI>News is not always the easiest to use, but will be the next thing
to improve.
</LI>
</UL>

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00213000000000000000">
TODO, features to implement</A>
</H2>

<P>

<H3><A NAME="SECTION00213100000000000000">
The next few things to be implemented:</A>
</H3>

<P>

<UL>
<LI>Multi-threaded folder access, to avoid blocking while retrieving slow
remote folders/servers.
</LI>
<LI>Message editor: rich text editing &amp; HTML
</LI>
</UL>

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00214000000000000000">
Help Needed</A>
</H2>

<P>
As you can see, we have big plans for Mahogany. To achieve all this,
we need some help. Areas where we would use some help are

<P>

<UL>
<LI>Updating this manual
</LI>
<LI>Python
</LI>
<LI>support for other mail protocols and mailfolder file formats, LDAP
</LI>
<LI>If you have access to other systems apart from Linux/Solaris/FreeBSD/Windows,
you are very welcome to help us port Mahogany to those platforms,
or to other hardware than Intel.
</LI>
<LI>Translations to other languages.
</LI>
<LI>MacOS development
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Generally we welcome help for anything. If you miss a feature
in Mahogany, we are more than happy to help you implement it yourself.
Naturally we tend to work on the features that we either need ourselves
or find interesting to do. If your priorities are different, join
our team and help us improve it. Mahogany is and will always be an
OpenSource(TM) project and your involvement is wanted! If you have
any questions about this, please contact the developers at
<A NAME="tex2html2"
  HREF="mailto:mahogany-users@lists.sourceforge.net">&lt;mahogany-users@lists.sourceforge.net&gt;</A>.
If you have questions about the Mahogany License, discuss them with
us - we don't want the license to scare anyone.</SPAN>
</LI>
</UL>

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00215000000000000000">
Copyright</A>
</H2>

<P>
Mahogany is copyright by The Mahogany Development Team (Founding members
Karsten Ballüder and Vadim Zeitlin). It is licensed under the Mahogany
``Artistic License'' as stated in section<A HREF="#License"><IMG  ALIGN="BOTTOM" BORDER="1" ALT="[*]" SRC="crossref.png"></A> or,
alternatively, under GNU General Public License. Some part of the
source tree distributed with Mahogany is not covered under this license.
These additional sources can be found in the ``<TT>extra/src</TT>''
subdirectory. Please check the files in the individual directories
for their copyright notices. However, they can be freely distributed
under certain conditions.

<P>

<H3><A NAME="SECTION00215100000000000000">
Why not the GPL/BSD/QPL/my favourite license?</A>
</H3>

<P>
Recently discussions about which license to chose for which project
provoked major flamewars in the Unix community. There is a trend to
put everything under the GPL or LGPL<A NAME="tex2html3"
  HREF="#foot149"><SUP><SPAN CLASS="arabic">1</SPAN>.<SPAN CLASS="arabic">1</SPAN></SUP></A>. We do not want to get involved in this highly emotional and political
discussion. Our intent is to allow everyone to use and modify Mahogany
while preserving some form of control over its development. That is
why we chose a modified version of Perl's Artistic License. It is
both more and less restrictive than the GPL in certain ways. We do
not believe that there is one right license for everything. The Mahogany
Artistic License is much simpler and easier to understand than the
GPL, so we feel more comfortable with it. If you want to do something
with Mahogany and feel that the license poses a problem, <SPAN  CLASS="textbf">please</SPAN>
contact us! We do not want the license to be a problem and any reasonable
request for deviating uses of Mahogany will be likely to be granted.
If in doubt, ask us and we will find a solution.

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00216000000000000000"></A><A NAME="License"></A>
<BR>
The Mahogany ``Artistic License''
</H2>

<P>

<H3><A NAME="SECTION00216100000000000000">
Preamble</A>
</H3>

<P>
The intent of this document is to state the conditions under which
this software package may be copied, such that the Copyright Holder
maintains some semblance of artistic control over the development
of the package, while giving the users of the package the right to
use and distribute the Package in a more-or-less customary fashion,
plus the right to make reasonable modifications.

<P>
This license is based on Perl's ``Artistic License'' and has been
adapted to better suit Mahogany. It aims to confirm with the Open-Source
specification. If you should have any questions about this license,
are unhappy with it or simply would like to comment on it, please
get in touch with us.

<P>

<H3><A NAME="SECTION00216200000000000000">
Definitions</A>
</H3>

<P>
``Package'' refers to the collection of files distributed by the Copyright
Holder, and derivatives of that collection of files created through
textual modification.

<P>
``Standard Version'' refers to such a Package if it has not been modified,
or has been modified in accordance with the wishes of the Copyright
Holder as specified below.

<P>
``Copyright Holder'' is whoever is named in the copyright or copyrights
for the package.

<P>
``You'' is you, if you're thinking about copying or distributing this
Package.

<P>
``Reasonable copying fee'' is whatever you can justify on the basis
of media cost, duplication charges, time of people involved, and so
on. (You will not be required to justify it to the Copyright Holder,
but only to the computing community at large as a market that must
bear the fee.)

<P>
``Freely Available'' means that no fee is charged for the item itself,
though there may be fees involved in handling the item. It also means
that recipients of the item may redistribute it under the same conditions
they received it.

<P>

<H4><A NAME="SECTION00216210000000000000">
Conditions of Use</A>
</H4>

<P>

<OL>
<LI>You may make and give away verbatim copies of the source form of the
Standard Version of this Package without restriction, provided that
you duplicate all of the original copyright notices and associated
disclaimers and only distribute the complete package as a whole.
</LI>
<LI>You may apply bug fixes, portability fixes and other modifications
derived from the Public Domain or from the Copyright Holder. A Package
modified in such a way shall still be considered the Standard Version.
</LI>
<LI>You may otherwise modify your copy of this Package in any way, provided
that you insert a prominent notice in each changed file stating how
and when you changed that file, and provided that you do at least
ONE of the following:

<P>

<OL>
<LI>place your modifications in the Public Domain or otherwise make them
Freely Available, such as by posting said modifications to Usenet
or an equivalent medium, or placing the modifications on a major archive
site such as sunsite.unc.edu, or by allowing the Copyright Holder
to include your modifications in the Standard Version of the Package,
and rename any non-standard executables so the names do not conflict
with standard executables, which must also be provided, and provide
a separate manual page for each non-standard executable that clearly
documents how it differs from the Standard Version. You must not make
the modified version depend on any other software or library if that
software or library is not Freely Available or if it is covered under
a license more restrictive than this.
</LI>
<LI>use the modified Package only within your corporation or organisation.
</LI>
<LI>make other distribution arrangements with the Copyright Holder.
</LI>
</OL>
</LI>
<LI>You may distribute the programs of this Package in object code or
executable form, provided that you do at least ONE of the following:

<P>

<OL>
<LI>distribute a Standard Version of the executables and library files,
together with instructions (in the manual page or equivalent) on where
to get the Standard Version.
</LI>
<LI>accompany the distribution with the machine-readable source of the
Package with your modifications, including the complete machine-readable
source of the unmodified Standard Version. You must not make the modified
version depend on any other software or library if that software or
library is not Freely Available or if it is covered under a license
more restrictive than this.
</LI>
<LI>give non-standard executables non-standard names, and clearly document
the differences in manual pages (or equivalent), together with instructions
on where to get the Standard Version. d.make other distribution arrangements
with the Copyright Holder.
</LI>
</OL>
</LI>
<LI>You may charge a reasonable copying fee for any distribution of this
Package. You may charge any fee you choose for support of this Package.
You may not charge a fee for this Package itself. However, you may
distribute this Package in aggregate with other (possibly commercial)
programs as part of a larger (possibly commercial) software distribution
provided that you do not advertise this Package as a product of your
own.
</LI>
<LI>The name of the Copyright Holder may not be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written
permission. However, all products derived from this software must
reproduce the original copyright notice as found in the Standard Version.
</LI>
<LI>THIS PACKAGE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
</LI>
</OL>

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00217000000000000000">
The License Dialog</A>
</H2>

<P>
When you start Mahogany for the first time, it will display the license
and conditions of use and ask you to accept or reject the license.
If you do not accept it, Mahogany will terminate. If you have any
questions about the license or want to otherwise comment on it, please
email the development team at <TT>mahogany-users@lists.sourceforge.net</TT>
.

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00218000000000000000">
Additional Credits</A>
</H2>

<P>

<H4><A NAME="SECTION00218010000000000000">
C-Client library: </A>
</H4>

<P>
The use of the c-client library requires us to display the following
copyright notice:

<P>
<BLOCKQUOTE>
Copyright 1999 by the University of Washington
<BR>
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and
its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted,
provided that the above copyright notice appears in all copies and
that both the above copyright notice and this permission notice appear
in supporting documentation, and that the name of the University of
Washington not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution
of the software without specific, written prior permission.&nbsp; This
software is made available &#34;as is&#34;, and THE UNIVERSITY
OF WASHINGTON DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH REGARD
TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE UNIVERSITY OF WASHINGTON BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL,
INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING
FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE) OR STRICT LIABILITY, ARISING OUT OF OR
IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.

</BLOCKQUOTE>

<P>

<H3><A NAME="SECTION00218100000000000000">
The OpenSSL toolkit:</A>
</H3>

<P>
Mahogany can be linked with the OpenSSL toolkit to support secure
communications over SSL. In that case, we must give due credit to
the authors and copyright of this library:

<P>
<BLOCKQUOTE>
This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for
use in the <A NAME="tex2html4"
  HREF="http://www.openssl.org/">OpenSSL Toolkit</A>
.This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
(eay@cryptsoft.com) This product includes software written by Tim
Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)&#34;

</BLOCKQUOTE>

<P>

<H3><A NAME="SECTION00218200000000000000">
wxWidgets (formerly known as wxWindows):</A>
</H3>

<P>
Mahogany is built using <A NAME="tex2html5"
  HREF="http://www.wxwidgets.org/">wxWidgets</A>
cross-platform class library - without it, Mahogany wouldn't have been
possible.

<P>

<H1><A NAME="SECTION00220000000000000000">
Introduction / Tutorial</A>
</H1>

<P>
To get started on Mahogany, you should look at the following sections
of this manual:

<P>

<UL>
<LI>The Folder Tree (<A HREF="#FolderTreeCtrl"><IMG  ALIGN="BOTTOM" BORDER="1" ALT="[*]" SRC="crossref.png"></A>) and how to create new folders
(<A HREF="#CreateNewFolderDialog"><IMG  ALIGN="BOTTOM" BORDER="1" ALT="[*]" SRC="crossref.png"></A>).
</LI>
<LI>The explanation of the INBOX (<A HREF="#INBOX_Folder"><IMG  ALIGN="BOTTOM" BORDER="1" ALT="[*]" SRC="crossref.png"></A>) and New Mail (<A HREF="#New_Mail_Folder"><IMG  ALIGN="BOTTOM" BORDER="1" ALT="[*]" SRC="crossref.png"></A>)
folders.
</LI>
</UL>
Obviously, the more of this manual you read, the better use you can
make of Mahogany. Once the manual has grown too large, we will provide
a short tutorial, but for now we go on coding instead.

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00221000000000000000">
Getting started</A>
</H2>

<P>
When you start Mahogany for the first time, it will first ask you
to accept the terms of its license. Note that you must accept it to
be able to use the program. After doing it, you will see the installation
wizard. It will guide you through several pages whose purpose is to
get the information absolutely required for running the program and
also prepare a useable initial setup for you. Please avoid abandoning
the wizard unless you really know what you are doing, so just click
next and ignore the checkbox on the first page for now.

<P>
It is quite likely that you already have some other email program
installed on your computer. Mahogany may import the configuration
settings for some of them (currently, Netscape Communicator, Pine
and XFMail but we have plans to add support for more programs in the
future) meaning that it will provide your existing settings as the
default values in the next pages. Of course, it is absolutely safe
to just skip this step and continue directly.

<P>
Next page asks you for your minimal personal information. You may
enter an empty personal name here if you wish (although it is better
to enter something) but it is required that you enter a valid email
address below. It will be used as your default return email address.
Note that you will be able to change this address in the future in
the program prefernces dialog as well as add other identities, possibly
with different email addresses, later.

<P>
The next page proposes you to setup some default servers. Windows
users <SPAN  CLASS="textbf">must</SPAN> specify an SMTP server here. Under Unix you may
leave it empty if you want to use a local MTA such as <SMALL>SENDMAIL</SMALL>,
<SMALL>QMAIL</SMALL> or <SMALL>EXIM.</SMALL> For the other servers you are free
to enter the server name or leave the entry empty if you don't want
to use it.

<P>
The following page is more interesting as it gives you the possibility
to configure some of the basic Mahogany options to your liking. Let's
consider them in order:

<P>

<UL>
<LI>Collect new mail (Unix only): typically, new mail arrives into the
system I<SMALL>NBOX</SMALL> folder on a Unix workstation. It is strongly
recommended that you don't leave it there but copy it immediately
instead into your own mail folder. Mahogany proposes to do this for
you by default, please let it do it unless you know better.
</LI>
<LI>Use Trash mailbox: this should be self explanatory except that you
should note that this is just the global default setting and that
it can be changed later on folder per folder basis (i.e. you can have
some unimportant folders from which mail is deleted directly but just
move the more important messages from other folders. which you might
wish to undelete later, to the Trash).
</LI>
<LI>Use Outbox: again, this should be clear but this is a global setting.
It can be changed later but it is probably worth setting it right
from the very beginning. If you have a permanent net connection you
probably don't need to use it.
</LI>
<LI>Use dial-up network: Mahogany may bring up or down your Internet connection
for the dial up users. This is a half-experimental feature and, as
above, is not particularly useful if have a permanent net connection
</LI>
<LI>Mailbox format (Unix only): this allows you to select the format for
the local system mailbox files Mahogany is going to create soon (you
will be able to choose the format for the folders you create yourself
when you do it, of course). The default is the MBX format which is
by far the most efficient but it is a binary format which is not understood
by as many programs as the traditional Berkeley MBOX format.
</LI>
</UL>
After finishing with the previous page you are almost done - the last
page of the wizard doesn't have any more options. It just proposes
you to send a test email to the address you had entered in the beginning
(remember that it must have been a valid one?). If you are absolutely
sure that you made no mistakes or if you can't or don't want to send
mail currently, please uncheck the checkbox at the bottom of the page.
Otherwise, let Mahogany do it as it might discover some problem with
your SMTP server. In any case, you should now see the main Mahogany
window which is described in the main section in front of you and
it means that Mahogany has been successfully installed. Congratulations!

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00222000000000000000">
The main window</A>
</H2>

<P>
The main window is broken in three parts. There is a tree of folders
(<A HREF="#FolderTreeCtrl"><IMG  ALIGN="BOTTOM" BORDER="1" ALT="[*]" SRC="crossref.png"></A>) on the left and a view of the currently selected
folder (<A HREF="#FolderView"><IMG  ALIGN="BOTTOM" BORDER="1" ALT="[*]" SRC="crossref.png"></A>) to the right of it which itself has two
parts: the upper one shows the list of all messages in the folder
while the lower one shows the currently previewed message.

<P>
The installation wizard has created a small number of standard folders
that Mahogany uses itself. Exactly which folders you now see on your
screen depends, of course, on the choices you have done in the wizard
but it should be a subset of the following list:

<P>

<UL>
<LI>``SentMail'': This folder is always created as Mahogany stores
copies of the messages you send in it. You may tell Mahogany not to
do it or save them in a different folder by modifying the options
near the top of the ``Compose'' page in the preferences dialog.
</LI>
<LI>``Trash'': If you have chosen to use it in the wizard, this
is the folder where the deleted messages will be moved to. The settings
for using it can be found in the ``Folders'' page of the preferences
dialog.
</LI>
<LI>``New Mail'': This is the central new mail folder. Under Unix
the messages arriving into the system I<SMALL>NBOX</SMALL> will be moved
here. Also, when you choose to collect mail from a remote POP3 or
IMAP4 server (see next subsection) it will be moved here as well.
</LI>
<LI>``INBOX'' represents the ``system inbox'' for your system.
You will only see it if you had chosen (in spite of multiple advices
against it) to not move new mail from it to the ``New Mail''
folder. Exact location of this folder depends on your system setup
but some common locations are <TT>/var/spool/mail</TT> or <TT>/var/mail.</TT>
</LI>
<LI>Server entries: you may also have entries for POP3, IMAP and NNTP
folders if you had specified them in the installation wizard. They
are described in details below.
</LI>
</UL>
The folder view on the right should show only one or two messages
right now (unless you already had some mail in your I<SMALL>NBOX</SMALL>).
The first of them should be self-explanatory and the second, if any,
is the test message Mahogany has sent to test your configuration.
If you didn't disable this test but don't see this message in the
folder, something may have gone wrong. Please look at the activity
log window which Mahogany has also created to see if there are any
errors in it. Also please see (<A HREF="#Troubleshooting"><IMG  ALIGN="BOTTOM" BORDER="1" ALT="[*]" SRC="crossref.png"></A>) section.

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00223000000000000000">
How to configure POP and IMAP folders?</A>
</H2>

<P>
Although the installation wizard did create entries for POP and/or
IMAP servers in the folder, they are probably not very useful right
now. Or maybe you didn't create them then and want to do it now -
then just choose ``Create'' item from the ``Folder'' menu
and follow the instructions. If you are already fed up with the wizards
you may prefer to dismiss it on the first page by selecting the checkbox
there and enter all the folder parameters directly in the folder properties
dialog.

<P>
If you have let the wizard create the folder, you still need to use
the folder properties dialog to customize it. By the way, this dialog
can be accessed by selecting the corresponding item either from the
``Folder'' menu in the menu bar or from the popup menu you obtain
by right-clicking the folder in the tree.

<P>
Browse this dialog to get an idea of some of the options you may change.
Please note that most of the options in the first, ``Access'',
page cannot be changed after the folder creation. The different options
are described in more details elsewhere in this manual.

<P>
Right now let us just give some examples of the typical configurations:

<P>

<OL>
<LI>Typical POP3 server: normally, the new mail is downloaded from the
POP3 folders locally so go to the ``New Mail'' page and select
``Collect new mail from this folder''. This will move all new
mail from the POP3 server to the ``New Mail'' folder. If you
want to copy it instead just check the ``Leave mail in this folder''
checkbox as well. Finally, if you want Mahogany to check the POP3
folder for the updates automatically please check the ``Permanently
monitor this folder'' checkbox and change the polling interval
for it if needed.
</LI>
<LI>IMAP server with only INBOX: if you only have INBOX folder on your
IMAP server you may configure it exactly as the POP3 server above.
You may also decide not to collect mail from it but read it directly
on the server - this is, in fact, the preferred mode of operation
as this works much better with IMAP than with POP.
</LI>
<LI>IMAP server with multiple folders: in this case you almost surely
don't want to download all new mail from the IMAP INBOX to the local
folders but keep it on server. You will probably be interested in
using filters (<A HREF="#Filters"><IMG  ALIGN="BOTTOM" BORDER="1" ALT="[*]" SRC="crossref.png"></A>) in this case.
</LI>
</OL>

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00224000000000000000">
How to set up your mail accounts</A>
</H2>

<P>
** This is currently missing, see the text in the FAQ. I will
explain here how to set up your accounts.

<P>

<H1><A NAME="SECTION00230000000000000000">
Setting up Mahogany, its configuration files</A>
</H1>

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00231000000000000000"></A><A NAME="cmdlineargs"></A>
<BR>
Mahogany command line options
</H2>

<P>
The following options are accepted. When both short and long options are listed
either one can be used and if the long options requires an argument, it must be
specified for the short one as well. The delimiter for the short options is
either <TT>/</TT> or <TT>-</TT> but only <TT>-</TT> can be used for the long ones.

<P>
<BR>
<BR>

   <DIV ALIGN="CENTER">

</DIV><TABLE CELLPADDING=3 BORDER="1">
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">Option</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">Meaning</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">-h, -help</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">show the summary of the command line options</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">-verbose</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">generate verbose messages (off by default)</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">-debug</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">enable debug logging</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">-safe</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">don't do anything automatically on startup</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">&nbsp;</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">may be useful if Mahogany crashes when trying</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">&nbsp;</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">to automatically do something after starting up</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">-userdir=dir</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">specify a non default directory containing all user</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">&nbsp;</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">data including, but not limited to, the file mailboxes</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">-config=file</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">specify the alternate configuration file to use</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">&nbsp;</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">may be also used to force using file instead of</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">&nbsp;</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">the registry under Windows</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">-b, -bcc=adr</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">specify a blind carbon-copy (BCC) recipient</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">-c, -cc=adr</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">specify a carbon-copy (CC) recipient</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">-s, -subject=str</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">specify the subject for the new message</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">-body=str</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">the initial text of the message</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">-f, -folder=str</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">the folder to open in the main frame on startup</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">-lang=lng</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">the language to use for the program messages,</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">&nbsp;</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">overrides the default language choice</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">-newsgroup=group</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">the news group to post the message to</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">-nopython</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">disable the embedded Python interpreter, even if it is
enabled in the program options (<A HREF="#PythonOptions"><IMG  ALIGN="BOTTOM" BORDER="1" ALT="[*]" SRC="crossref.png"></A>)</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE>

<P>
<BR>
<BR>

<P>
The remaining command line arguments are taken as the recipients for the new
message.

<P>
If either of the <TT>-bcc</TT>, <TT>-cc</TT>, <TT>-subject</TT>, <TT>-newsgroup</TT> or
<TT>-body</TT> options is given or a command line argument follows the options,
the composer will be automatically opened on startup. If the ``Always run only
one instance'' option (see <A HREF="#onlyoneinstance"><IMG  ALIGN="BOTTOM" BORDER="1" ALT="[*]" SRC="crossref.png"></A>) is set, the composer will be
opened in the already running instance of the program, if any.

<P>
Please do use <TT>-debug</TT> option if something goes wrongly, it can give
valuable information about the problem! See also the corresponding option
(<A HREF="#debugoption"><IMG  ALIGN="BOTTOM" BORDER="1" ALT="[*]" SRC="crossref.png"></A>).

<P>
<A NAME="configcmdlineopt"></A>If you want to use the configuration files under Windows (by default the
registry will be used to store the program options) you should use the
<TT>-config=file</TT> option each time when running the program. The easiest way
to do it is to create a shortcut to <TT>M.exe</TT> and enter this argument there.

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00232000000000000000">
User configuration files (Unix only)</A>
</H2>

<P>
When run for the first time, <SPAN  CLASS="textit">Mahogany</SPAN> creates a directory called
<TT>.M</TT> in the user's home directory. The file <TT>$HOME/.M/config</TT>
will contain the current program configuration for this user. Only
values different from the default configuration are stored here. If
you want to obtain a list of all possible options (although arguably
if you are so curious, you'd better read <SPAN  CLASS="textit">Mahogany</SPAN> sources directly),
you can manually add the entry

<P>
<BLOCKQUOTE>
<TT>RecordDefaults = 1</TT>

</BLOCKQUOTE>
to the <TT>[M/Profiles]</TT> section of the configuration file.
This will cause all values which are used to be written to the configuration
file.

<P>
Note that an easy way to ``reinstall'' Mahogany is to move <TT>$HOME/.M/config</TT>
file to some other location or even delete it and restart Mahogany
- then it will go through the installation process once again.

<P>

<H3><A NAME="SECTION00232100000000000000">
System wide configuration file</A>
</H3>

<P>
<SPAN  CLASS="textit">Mahogany</SPAN> can be pre-configured on a system wide basis by supplying
a <TT>M.conf</TT> file in the installation directory (e.g. <TT>/usr/share/mahogany/M.conf</TT>).
The syntax for this configuration file is identical to the user's
configuration file, so you can just copy a user's file to this location
and edit it by hand. Useful settings for a system wide default are
servers or mail return addresses. Entries prefixed with an exclamation
mark ``!'' are marked as immutable and cannot be overwritten
by the user. This can be used by the system administrator to hard-wire
certain settings, like, for example the return mail addresses or mail
servers to use.

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00233000000000000000"></A><A NAME="registrykey"></A>
<BR>
Registry (Windows only)
</H2>

<P>
Under Windows the user settings are by default stored in the registry, under
<TT>HKCU<SPAN CLASS="MATH"><IMG
 WIDTH="14" HEIGHT="39" ALIGN="MIDDLE" BORDER="0"
 SRC="img2.png"
 ALT="$\backslash$"></SPAN>Software<SPAN CLASS="MATH"><IMG
 WIDTH="14" HEIGHT="39" ALIGN="MIDDLE" BORDER="0"
 SRC="img2.png"
 ALT="$\backslash$"></SPAN>Mahogany-Team<SPAN CLASS="MATH"><IMG
 WIDTH="14" HEIGHT="39" ALIGN="MIDDLE" BORDER="0"
 SRC="img2.png"
 ALT="$\backslash$"></SPAN>M</TT> key
where <TT>HKCU</TT> stands for <TT>HKEY_CURRENT_USER</TT>.

<P>
If you encounter a mention of some <TT>Entry</TT> in the group <TT>[Group]</TT>
of the config file, it maps to a value <TT>Entry</TT> in the key
<TT>Profiles<SPAN CLASS="MATH"><IMG
 WIDTH="14" HEIGHT="39" ALIGN="MIDDLE" BORDER="0"
 SRC="img2.png"
 ALT="$\backslash$"></SPAN>Group</TT> under the root key specified above under
Windows.

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00234000000000000000"></A><A NAME="multiconfigsources"></A>
<BR>
Using multiple configuration sources
</H2>

<P>
The default behaviour described in the sections above is the simplest possible
and works well as long as Mahogany is only used on a single machine. However it
is not ideal if you want to use it from several different installations. It
should be noted that in the simplest case, when all these installations use the
same operating system and are similarly configured, you may simply transfer the
Mahogany configuration file <A NAME="tex2html6"
  HREF="#foot312"><SUP><SPAN CLASS="arabic">1</SPAN>.<SPAN CLASS="arabic">2</SPAN></SUP></A> to the other machine, however this doesn't work if you want to use the
program from both Unix and Windows as in such case some settings are bound to
be different.

<P>
The solution is to use multiple <SPAN  CLASS="textit">configuration sources</SPAN> (they are called
sources and not files because, in general, the settings can also be stored in
other locations such as on a remote IMAP server). To set this up, choose the
corresponding command from the <TT>"Edit"</TT> menu: it will present you with
the dialog allowing to create more configuration sources (currently only local
files are supported) and to change their priority by moving them up or down in
the list.

<P>
Here is an example of a setup recommended for IMAP users:

<OL>
<LI>OS-specific settings are stored in <TT>machine-os.conf</TT>: this
         file should be tiny as the only OS-specific options are those that
         involve external paths, e.g. the user directory.
</LI>
<LI>Machine-specific settings are stored in <TT>machine.conf</TT>: this
         file is still quite small as the only machine-specific entries are
         usually the IMAP and SMTP host names.
</LI>
<LI>All the rest is stored in <TT>global.conf</TT> which may be shared
         among all installations. This file is, correspondingly, usually large.
</LI>
</OL>

<P>

<H1><A NAME="SECTION00240000000000000000">
The User Interface</A>
</H1>

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00241000000000000000">
The Main Window</A>
</H2>

<P>
<SPAN  CLASS="textit">Mahogany</SPAN>'s main window is vertically divided into two parts.
On the left it has a tree view (<A HREF="#FolderTreeCtrl"><IMG  ALIGN="BOTTOM" BORDER="1" ALT="[*]" SRC="crossref.png"></A>) of all available
mail or news folders. On the right of it, it shows the currently selected
folder in a folder view (see <A HREF="#FolderView"><IMG  ALIGN="BOTTOM" BORDER="1" ALT="[*]" SRC="crossref.png"></A>).

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00242000000000000000">
The Folder Tree</A>
</H2>

<P>
<A NAME="FolderTreeCtrl"></A>The folder tree shows a hierarchical view of
all folders managed by <SPAN  CLASS="textit">Mahogany</SPAN>, this includes both mail folders
and newsgroups. Folders can be grouped hierarchically and inherit
settings from their parent folders (e.g. the server host). Clicking
the right mouse button on any tree node will pop up a menu with some
options. To open a folder or connection to a server for the first
time, choose ``Create New Folder'' which will show you a dialog
(<A HREF="#CreateNewFolderDialog"><IMG  ALIGN="BOTTOM" BORDER="1" ALT="[*]" SRC="crossref.png"></A>).

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00243000000000000000">
Create New Folder Dialog</A>
</H2>

<P>
<A NAME="CreateNewFolderDialog"></A>This menu entry allows you to open a
connection to a server or view a mailfolder. No matter whether it
is a POP, IMAP, NNTP connection , a file based mailfolder, a newsgroup
or whatever, Mahogany treats them all the same and calls them all
``folder''. The dialog has several pages which include at least:
<SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Access</SPAN> (<A HREF="#FolderAccessPage"><IMG  ALIGN="BOTTOM" BORDER="1" ALT="[*]" SRC="crossref.png"></A>), <SPAN  CLASS="textbf">New Mail</SPAN> ()<SPAN  CLASS="textbf">,
Compose</SPAN> (<A HREF="#ComposePage"><IMG  ALIGN="BOTTOM" BORDER="1" ALT="[*]" SRC="crossref.png"></A>) and <SPAN  CLASS="textbf">MessageViewer</SPAN> (<A HREF="#MessageViewerPage"><IMG  ALIGN="BOTTOM" BORDER="1" ALT="[*]" SRC="crossref.png"></A>).

<P>

<H3><A NAME="SECTION00243100000000000000">
Access</A>
</H3>

<P>

<UL>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf"><A NAME="FolderAccessPage"></A>Folder Type</SPAN>
<BR>
Here you can choose from the currently supported folder types. The
``News'' type is for reading a local newsspool, it is only partially
supported at present but should work fine in most circumstances. ``NNTP''
is for reading news from a remote newsserver. ``IMAP'' and ``POP3''
are for accessing remote mail server. If possible, prefer IMAP over
POP, it is much more powerful and significantly faster, saving modem
time.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">User name</SPAN>
<BR>
For those folder types where it is required, the user name or login
to get access to them.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Password</SPAN>
<BR>
For those folder types where it is required, you can specify the password
here. If you leave it empty, Mahogany will prompt you for the password
whenever it is needed. If you want to auto-collect mail from this
folder or even just check it in the background, you should specify
it, otherwise you will be asked for it at least once per session (you
will be able to tell Mahogany if it should keep it for the session
duration or not). <SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Note that storing passwords is a potential
security risk!</SPAN> The password typed in here will get stored in your
<TT>$HOME/.M/config</TT> configuration file on Unix or in the registry
on Windows. While this file will be created as only readable by you
and the passwords be encrypted (using very weak encryption), it is
nevertheless a certain risk. If you accidentally change the permissions
of that file, someone else could obtain your passwords, though Mahogany
would detect this the next time it starts and warn you about it.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Server</SPAN>
<BR>
For the folders which require a server setting, you can specify the
server host here. If unspecified they will inherit the setting from
the global preferences. You may use a colon (:) after the server name
to specify a non default port.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Newsgroup</SPAN>
<BR>
For NNTP and Newsspool folders, the name of the newsgroup, e.g. comp.os.linux.announce
.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Comment</SPAN>
<BR>
Whatever you like to add, this is ignored by Mahogany.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">File name</SPAN>
<BR>
For folders of type ``File'', the filename or directory where
the folder is.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Collect all mail from this folder</SPAN>
<BR>
Makes this folder ``incoming''. Mahogany will regularly check
the folder for new mail and move any messages to the global folder
for new mail, usually the ``New Mail'' folder.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Keep server connection when idle</SPAN>
<BR>
If selected, Mahogany will keep the folder open during the entire
program session after it had been opened for the first time. This
can significantly speed up access to large folders as opening them
can take some time. A very useful option for frequently used folders
and Mahogany uses it by default for the ``SentMail'' folder,
for example.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Force re-open on ping</SPAN>
<BR>
This forces Mahogany to close and re-open the mailbox when trying
to update the information about it. This is required for some broken
servers to correctly detect new mail. Usually this should not be needed.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Anonymous access</SPAN>
<BR>
This marks the folder as anonymous, such as for anonymous IMAP access,
telling Mahogany that no user name or password are required to access
it.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Use Secure Sockets Layer (SSL)</SPAN>
<BR>
This option is only available if your copy of Mahogany was built with
SSL support. Tick this box to access a secure IMAP/POP/NNTP server.
It must, of course, be supported by the server side, too. It will
ensure that your communication with the server is encrypted and safe
from eavesdropping. For this to work, the user might also need to
open the preferences dialog, and, in the <SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Misc</SPAN> tab, fill-out
the boxes labeled ``Path where to find shared libssl'' and ``Path
where to find shared libcrypto''. Linux users must also see the SSL
section of the FAQ.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Folder can be accessed without network</SPAN>
<BR>
This option is only useful if you use Mahogany dial-up support - then
check it to tell Mahogany that you don't need your Internet connection
(and thus don't want to dial your ISP) to access this folder.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Can be opened</SPAN>
<BR>
This is usually checked for the normal folder but may be unchecked
for the folders which only contain subfolders (see also below) but
not any messages. Normally you should allow Mahogany detect this itself,
this checkbox is only here to allow you to override Mahogany if it
does something wrong.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Contains subfolders</SPAN>
<BR>
Select this if the mailbox represents not a mailbox or newsgroup but
a hierarchy on an IMAP or NNTP server. E.g. comp.os.linux.announce
would be a normal newsgroup (unticked), while comp.os.linux would
be a new hierarchy (ticked). Normally you should allow Mahogany detect
this itself, this checkbox is only here to allow you to override Mahogany
if it does something wrong.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Hide folder in tree</SPAN>
<BR>
If you do not want this mailbox to be shown in the folder tree (unless
you select the option to show all hidden folders), tick this box.
For example, if you move all new mail from your POP3 folder to your
INBOX you probably don't need to show POP3 folder in the tree at all
so you may want to hide it to save valuable screen estate.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Folder subtype</SPAN>
<BR>
Here you can select some sub-type, e.g. different mailbox formats.
This option cannot be changed after the folder creation.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Icon for this folder</SPAN>
<BR>
Allows you to set a different icon for the mailbox.
</LI>
</UL>

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00244000000000000000">
Folder Views</A>
</H2>

<P>
<A NAME="FolderView"></A>A Folder View is a window or part of a window displaying
the contents of a mail folder or a newsgroup. It consists of two parts:

<P>

<UL>
<LI>The list of message headers at the top, showing message subjects,
authors, dates, etc.
</LI>
<LI>The contents of the currently selected message below.
</LI>
</UL>

<P>

<H3><A NAME="SECTION00244100000000000000">
Understanding the folder view</A>
</H3>

<P>
The messages are displayed in the folder view according to the curent
sort order which may be changed either from the folder properties
dialog (of course, it can be set independently for each folder or
be the same for all folders at once) or by clicking on the column
header. In the latter case, clicking on, for example, ``S<SMALL>UBJECT</SMALL>''
column, will sort the messages by subject if they were not sorted
by subject already, otherwise it will sort them by subject in the
reverse order. This allows you to sort the listing on some column
by just clicking it and to reverse the sort order by clicking it again.

<P>
Most of the columns are self explanatory. It should be mentioned that
the date format is configurable from the folder view page of the folder
properties dialog and you may set it to anything you like. In particular,
some people find it very useful to show the date in GMT instead of
the local time.

<P>
The status column (which is usually the first one, although you may
change the column order from the same page already mentioned above)
may be empty or contain one or more flags:

<P>
<TABLE CELLPADDING=3 BORDER="1">
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">Symbol</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">Meaning</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">*</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">message is flagged or important</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">A</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">message was answered to</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">D</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">message is marked as deleted and will disappear after expunge</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">U</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">message is unread: you haven't seen its body yet</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">R</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">message is recent: this is the first time you see it</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">N</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">message is new: it is recent and unread</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE>

<P>
Accordingly, if nothing appears in the status column, the message
was read but wasn't deleted nor flagged and this is not the first
time you see it. Note that not all kinds of folders support all kinds
of flags: while IMAP servers always do, POP servers are not capable
of storing the message flags and so all messages will always appear
as new in them.

<P>
Note that each message flag has also the corresponding colour which
is used to highlight the message in the folder view and also to highlight
the folder containing this message in the folder tree. These colours
can be changed from the folder view page of the options dialog, as
usual.

<P>

<H3><A NAME="SECTION00244200000000000000"></A><A NAME="keybindings"></A>
<BR>
Keyboard and mouse handling
</H3>

<P>
The reaction to a mouse click in the list of messages depends on the
preferences setting ``Preview message when selected``. When
the option is selected, a single mouse click will select the message
and load it into the preview window. If the option is not set, the
message will only be selected but not previewed automatically, which
is very useful for accessing mail folders through a slow connection.
The same setting effects the behaviour of the space bar, it acts exactly
like a single mouse click in the window and will only cause a message
to be previewed if a single mouse click is configured to do so. The
space key can be used to view the message under the current cursor.

<P>
Other keyboard bindings are summarized in the following table (except where
explicitly noticed, lower and uppe case keys work do the same thing):

<P>
<BR>
<BR>
<DIV ALIGN="CENTER">

</DIV><TABLE CELLPADDING=3 BORDER="1">
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">Key</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">Action performed</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">*</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">mark/unmark message under cursor</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">SPACE</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">preview message under cursor</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">D or DEL</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">mark selected messages for deletion</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">U</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">remove deletion mark from selected messages</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">X or #</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">expunge messages marked for deletion</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">C</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">copy marked messages to another folder</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">M</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">move selected messages to another folder</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">S</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">save marked messages to files</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">P</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">print marked messages</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">R</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">reply to messages</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">F</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">forward messages</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">O</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">open messages in separate window</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">H</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">toggle display of all headers</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">BACK/PG UP</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">scroll the message preview one page up</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">PG DOWN</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">scroll the message preview one page down</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">Ctrl-U</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">view next unread message</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">/</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">start forward search for a string</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">?</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">start reverse search for a string</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">n</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">go to the next match (after doing a search)</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">N</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">go to the previous match (after doing a search)</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE>
<P>

<BR>
<BR>

<P>
Note that all commands for which it makes sense operate either on
the current message only if there is no selection or on all selected
messages at once. You can use the mouse or the cursor arrows together
with the SHIFT or CTRL keys to select multiple messages at once. The
commands which affect the message preview are inactive if no message
is previewed.

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00245000000000000000">
Migrating from another mail client</A>
</H2>

<P>
<A NAME="Import"></A><SPAN  CLASS="textit">Mahogany</SPAN> supports importing the settings from
a few other popular mail clients. The current list includes Netscape,
Pine, XFMail and Eudora. Depending on the mail client only part of
its settings may be imported but in the best case Mahogany can import
the address books, the configuration settings, the filter rules and
the list of folders to use. To use this feature, choose
<TT>"Mail|Import..."</TT> command and follow the dialogs.

<P>
Even if you don't find your email client in the list proposed in the
dialog, everything is not lost. You won't be able to import its configuration
information nor the filter rules but you might still recuperate the
address book information if your program can export the addresses
in the standard comma separated format or as vCards. In either case
you can then import just the address books from the address book editor.

<P>
Finally, <SPAN  CLASS="textit">Mahogany</SPAN> can automatically create the entries in the
folder tree for all MBOX (standard Unix format, also used by Eudora)
files under the given directory. To do this, select the folder in
the tree which you want the new folders to appear under and choose
<TT>"Folder|Import folder tree..."</TT> command.

<P>

<H1><A NAME="SECTION00250000000000000000">
Reading Mail</A>
</H1>

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00251000000000000000">
The INBOX Folder</A>
</H2>

<P>
<A NAME="INBOX_Folder"></A>The folder named INBOX has a special meaning.
It is the main system mailbox and cannot be deleted or renamed. All
new mail will arrive in here. At present, Mahogany leaves all messages
in the system inbox. Mahogany will collect mail from several different
incoming mailboxes, e.g. the INBOX and some additional POP3 accounts,
and move them to a new folder.

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00252000000000000000">
The ``New Mail'' Folder</A>
</H2>

<P>
<A NAME="New_Mail_Folder"></A>Created by Mahogany the first time you start
it, this is a file mailbox which by default receives all new mail.
If you mark any folder as incoming, its contents will be checked regularly
and any new mail in it moved to the ``New Mail'' folder. If
you do not like this name, you can change it in the preferences dialog.
Mahogany should in all situations recover from closed connections
or disappearing mailboxes, so it is safe to let it run over long periods
of time. If a server connection times out, you will receive one or
possibly a few error messages but Mahogany will reopen the connection
and continue as usual.

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00253000000000000000">
Other Folders</A>
</H2>

<P>
The folders are organized in a tree structure: this is purely for
the convenience of the user, so any folder may contain as many other
folders as needed. Folders can be managed either from the top level
menu or from the popup menu in the folder control invoked by pressing
the right mouse button in it. You can group folders together by making
the sub folders of another folder. This builds no physical connection
between the folders but makes the sub folder inherit certain configuration
defaults settings from their parent folder. We will soon add a ``folder
group'' folder type not representing any mailbox but just being
a group of folders.

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00254000000000000000">
Accessing Mail Remotely</A>
</H2>

<P>
Mahogany supports two protocols for accessing remote mail servers:
POP3 and IMAP. While POP3 is more commonly available, IMAP is definitely
the superiour protocol and should be used where available. It will
generally give you more functionality and will be much faster over
slow connections. Both normally require you to log in with a username
and password, but can be configured to work anonymously if supported
by the server. IMAP additionally allows you to access any mailfolder
file on the remote machine. For example, if you use Mahogany on a
remote machine ``<TT>atwork.company.com</TT>'', you might have
your local <TT>INBOX</TT> (which could be <TT>/var/spool/mail/MyUserName</TT>
on a unix box) and also your ``New Mail'' folder, which usually
is ``<TT>~/.M/New Mail</TT>''. With IMAP, if
you log in from home, you can not only access your INBOX on the atwork.company.com
mail server, but also the ``<TT>New Mail</TT>'' folder there,
by telling Mahogany to use ``<TT>/home/MyUserName/.M/New Mail</TT>''
as the path to the mailbox file. Like this, you can access any mail
folder on that machine that you have access to locally, making remote
access to your mail much more flexible than just accessing your new
messages.

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00255000000000000000"></A><A NAME="searching"></A>
<BR>
Searching for Messages
</H2>

<P>
There are two ways to search for the messages in Mahogany. One is very simple:
just press <TT>'/'</TT> or <TT>'?'</TT> in the folder view and then use
<TT>'n'</TT> and <TT>'N'</TT> keys to go to the next and previous matches
respectively (see also <A HREF="#keybindings"><IMG  ALIGN="BOTTOM" BORDER="1" ALT="[*]" SRC="crossref.png"></A>). This allows to only search for a
string in the message header and to do it inside one folder only - but to do
it quickly.

<P>
If you need more powerful search, you should use <TT>"Folder|Search..."</TT>
command which opens the search dialog where you can choose more options. In
particular, you can use buttons there to add other folders to search (by
default only the current folder is searched). If any messages are found, they
are shown in a separate folder view.

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00256000000000000000">
Filters</A>
</H2>

<P>

<H3><A NAME="SECTION00256100000000000000"></A><A NAME="Filters"></A>
<BR>
Overview
</H3>

<P>
Mahogany has powerful builtin filters. The filters are written in
a real (albeit small and specialized) programming language but there
is also GUI support for creating them. All the existing filters appear
in the dialog shown by the ``Filters rules'' command of the
``Edit'' menu. You can also access the filters configured for
a specific folder by selecting ``Filters'' from the ``Folders''
menu. The difference between these dialogs is that not all filters
are associated with all folder, i.e. you may have two filters and
two folders but the first folder can use only the first filter rule
and the second - only the second one. The global ``Filter rules''
dialog allows you to manage all the filters but after creating a new
one you still must associate it with some folder or folders for it
to be useful.

<P>
After creating some filters you may go to the ``Filters'' dialog
of the ``Folder'' menu (you will also have an opportunity to
go directly there immediately after the filter creation) and check
the filters you would like to use for this folder. The filters are
applied in the order in which they appear in the list, so use the
up and down buttons to arrange them as needed: the order of filters
is important because if one filter had decided to move a message to
another folder the subsequent filters won't process this message at
all.

<P>

<H3><A NAME="SECTION00256200000000000000">
Filter Rule Editor</A>
</H3>

<P>
This dialog allows you to edit an individual filter. You may use the
different controls to compose it, note the ``More'' button which
allows you to add a new condition to the rule. You may notice that
when you change something in the upper part of the dialog, the text
in the lower part is updated to reflect it: this text is the source
of the filter program which Mahogany will apply. By experimenting
with the dialog controls it should be easy to see the different possibilities
of this language. In a few words, it is a C-like language which has
several built-in functions for testing for the various conditions
and performing some actions. All of the usual C operations are supported.

<P>
You may also edit the filter program text directly but be warned that
it will be impossible to use the GUI controls to modify it then because
they are not flexible enough to be able to express an arbitrary filter
program.

<P>

<H3><A NAME="SECTION00256300000000000000">
Quick Filter</A>
</H3>

<P>
There is another, quicker, way to create filters as well: this is
done with ``Quick filter'' command from the ``Message''
menu or the popup menu displayed when you right click the message.
It allows to easily create filters for the most common cases. Note
that you may update the filter rule later using the full-fledged filter
edit dialog if you decide to add more conditions to it, for example.

<P>

<H3><A NAME="SECTION00256400000000000000"></A><A NAME="filterdialogs"></A>
<BR>
Managing Filters
</H3>

<P>
After some time of using the program, you will probably end up with quite a few
filters. Several dialogs in Mahogany will help you with managing them:

<UL>
<LI>The most useful dialog is the one allowing you to edit all the filters
         associated to the current folder and it is accessed using
         <TT>"Folder|Filters..."</TT>. It allows you to add new filters, edit
         existing ones and also to change the order of applying the filters to
         the messages in this folder.

<P>
</LI>
<LI>Another dialog in <TT>"Edit|Filter rules..."</TT> shows you all defined
         filters and also allows you to add new ones or edit or delete the
         existing ones.

<P>
</LI>
<LI>Finally, if you don't know which filter copies the messages to some
         folder, you may use <TT>"Edit|Where is filter..."</TT> command to find
         it out. This is handy if you realize that you want to filter some more
         messages to the given folder - just use this command to quickly find
         the filters you already have for it and add a new condition to an
         existing filter.
</LI>
</UL>

<P>

<H3><A NAME="SECTION00256500000000000000">
Filter Language</A>
</H3>

<P>
Almost, but not quite all constructs of the filter language are accessible from
the GUI editor, so if you need something which it doesn't provide yuo can try
editing the filter text directly. Be warned, however, that you wouldn't be able
to use the GUI again if you do this.

<P>
The syntax of the filter language is very simple. It is C-like but a program
consists just of a sequence of <TT>if</TT> statements. Inside each of them you
can have a condition of (almost) arbitrary complexity using the usual C
operations <TT>&amp;&amp;</TT>, <TT>||</TT> and <TT>!</TT> and the built-in filter
functions. The filter functions correspond to the choices in the GUI dialogs.

<P>
Each test also has the associated code block executed only if it succeeds. Here
again you can use the built-in functions which are the same as the verbs in the
GUI controls.

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00257000000000000000"></A><A NAME="spam"></A>
<BR>
Spam filtering
</H2>

<P>
Mahogany supports pluggable spam filter modules. In theory it means that
anybody can write such modules but in practice only two of them currently exist
and are described in details below.

<P>
However independently of the spam filters used, the interface to them remains
always the same:

<UL>
<LI>The spam filter options can be edited in
         <TT>"Edit|Spam filters..."</TT> dialog. Mostly you can rely on the
         default values (but see <A HREF="#DSPAM"><IMG  ALIGN="BOTTOM" BORDER="1" ALT="[*]" SRC="crossref.png"></A>).
</LI>
<LI>You can check whether the currently selected messages are deemed to
         be spam by using <TT>"Message|Spam|Check message..."</TT> command.
         This is mainly useful for testing, see below for how to check for spam
         automatically.
</LI>
<LI>If a statistical filter mistakenly recognizes a message as spam (so
         called false positive, this should hopefully be very rare) or misses a
         spam message, you can correct its mistake by using the two other
         commands of <TT>"Message|Spam"</TT> submenu. Please note that you
         should <SPAN  CLASS="textit">not</SPAN> use these commands for the messages not seen by the
         spam filter at all, i.e. they don't work for training it but only for
         correcting its errors.
</LI>
</UL>

<P>
To actually use the spam filters you need to configure a filter rule (see
<A HREF="#Filters"><IMG  ALIGN="BOTTOM" BORDER="1" ALT="[*]" SRC="crossref.png"></A>) using them. Usually you just create a rule named "Spam" using
the "Seems to be spam" test and "Move to some Junk folder" (you will need to
create this junk folder too) as its action. If you feel very confident in the
spam filters (or just have backup of your mail somewhere) you can also
configure the rule to delete the messages recognized as spam immediately but
this is not recommended.

<P>

<H3><A NAME="SECTION00257100000000000000">
Simple header analyzer</A>
</H3>

<P>
This is a very simple filter which looks for some common characteristics of
spam mail in the message headers. Its accuracy is much worse than that of DSPAM
but it is also much faster to execute and doesn't need any training. You may
configure its options in the <TT>"Edit|Spam filters..."</TT> dialog.

<P>

<H3><A NAME="SECTION00257200000000000000"></A><A NAME="DSPAM"></A>
<BR>
DSPAM
</H3>

<P>
DSPAM is a statistical spam filter which means that to use it in the optimal
way you need to <SPAN  CLASS="textit">train</SPAN> it first. Just open the <TT>"Edit|Spam
filters..."</TT> dialog and use the <TT>Train</TT> button on the DSPAM page. For the
best results you should train the filter with 2500 spam and 2500 non-spam (ham)
messages. Be warned that this can take a rather long time and also consumes
significant amount of disk space (of order of 50Mb) - however the results are
well worth it.

<P>
If you don't have enough messages to train it with, you can start using it
immediately but in this case you should be ready to manually mark messages as
spams as explained in <A HREF="#spam"><IMG  ALIGN="BOTTOM" BORDER="1" ALT="[*]" SRC="crossref.png"></A>. Please also remember to actually create a
spam filter rule to really use DSPAM at all.

<P>

<H1><A NAME="SECTION00260000000000000000">
Sending Mail</A>
</H1>

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00261000000000000000">
To: CC: and BCC: Settings</A>
</H2>

<P>
All of these fields accept either mail addresses, aliases or folder
names. Aliases must be expanded by using the tabulator key or the
Expand button next to the fields. If multiple entries match the text,
you will be prompted with a list to choose from.

<P>

<H3><A NAME="SECTION00261100000000000000">
Using Folder names as an address</A>
</H3>

<P>
Folder names can be entered by prefixing them with a hash ('#') sign.
This will cause a copy of the message to be saved in the folder with
this name. If no such folder exists, it will be created in the mail
folder directory. For example, entering ``joe.user@foo.com, #myMail''
in the To: field, will send the mail to Joe User and save a copy of
it in the folder ``myMail''. Note, that if you have your folders
organised hierarchically, you must specify the full path to the folder
in the folder tree control. An example: If you have a group of folders
in the tree, called ``Work'' and want to save a copy of the
message to the folder ``TODO'' which is a sub-folder of ``Work'',
you need to add ``#Work/TODO'' in the address field. Instead
of using the To: field for this, you can also use CC: or BCC:, there
is no difference.

<P>

<H3><A NAME="SECTION00261200000000000000">
To:</A>
</H3>

<P>
The primary address to which to send the message, multiple addresses
can be entered and must be comma-separated.

<P>

<H3><A NAME="SECTION00261300000000000000">
CC:</A>
</H3>

<P>
CC means Carbon Copy - copies of the message will get sent to the
addresses listed here.

<P>

<H3><A NAME="SECTION00261400000000000000">
BCC:</A>
</H3>

<P>
BCC means Blind Carbon Copy - like CC:, copies will be sent to the
addresses listed here, but the addresses will not be stored in the
mail header. This allows you to send copies without other recipients
of the message knowing about it.

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00262000000000000000">
Key Bindings in the Message Editor</A>
</H2>

<P>
<BR>
<BR>
<DIV ALIGN="CENTER">

</DIV><TABLE CELLPADDING=3 BORDER="1">
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">Key</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">Function</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">ALT-D</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">delete word</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">CTRL-Y</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">delete line</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">CTRL-U</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">delete to begin of line</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">CTRL-K</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">delete to end of line</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">CTRL-C</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">copy selection to clipboard</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">SHIFT-INSERT</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">&nbsp;</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">CTRL-X</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">cut selection to clipboard</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">SHIFT-DELETE</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">&nbsp;</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">CTRL-V</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">paste text from clipboard</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">CTRL-INSERT</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">&nbsp;</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">CTRL-S</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">search for text</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">CTRL-T</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">search same text again</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE>
<P>

<BR>
<BR>

<P>

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00263000000000000000">
Using the address book</A>
</H2>

<P>
Although you may directly enter the addresses of recipients of your
message into the different address fields (``To:``, ``Cc:``
and ``Bcc:`` although the last two are optional and so might
not appear), there is a more convenient way to do it using the address
book. To insert an address fromyour address book you should type the
first few letters of either the ``nick name'' (or the ``alias'')
for this address or the the first letters of the e-mail address and
press &lt;TAB&gt; key or click on the ``Expand'' button. If there
is only one possible expansion for the letters you have typed, Mahogany
will automatically replace them with the corresponding full e-mail
address. Other possible cases: either there are no matches at all
and a message in the status line of the window will tell you so, or
there are more than one match in which case you will be presented
with a choice of all possible completions.

<P>
<SPAN  CLASS="textit">Hint:</SPAN> if you press &lt;TAB&gt; immediately after the address expansion
it will bring you to the next text entry zone and will not attempt
the address expansion the second time.

<P>
A special feature of the address expansion is the so-called ``group
extension'': if you type the first few letters of an address group
name (see ``Address Book Editor'' description for more about
it) it will be replaced by the addresses of all the addresses in this
group. So, for example, if you have a group called ``Friends''
you may type ``fri'' in the ``To:`` text entry zone and
after pressing &lt;TAB&gt; it will be replaced by the e-mail addresses of
all your friends.

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00264000000000000000">
The Mail Composition Window</A>
</H2>

<P>
<A NAME="MailCompositionWindow"></A>The composition window's appearance
depends on your configuration settings (<A HREF="#ComposePage"><IMG  ALIGN="BOTTOM" BORDER="1" ALT="[*]" SRC="crossref.png"></A>). Generally,
it will at least show text entry fields to specify who to send the
message to, for the subject and a large editing window below for the
actual message itself. It also features an EXPAND button next to the
address field, which allows you to lookup addresses in the currently
loaded addressbooks. If you type in the beginning or a substring of
a name, alias or email address and either press the expand button
or the tabulator key, Mahogany will look up a list of matching addressbook
entries and either expand it directly or prompt you with the matching
choices. This works for the main address field (``To'') as well
as for the carbon copy addresses (``CC'' and ``BCC'').
If you specify an address in the ``CC'' or ``BCC'' fields,
these people will receive a copy of the message. The difference between
them is that the list of addresses in ``CC'' is included in
the message, while the ``BCC'' (blind carbon copy) addresses
will be suppressed in the message keeping them anonymous. If you enter
an address like ``#myfolder'', Mahogany will interpret it as
the name of a mailfolder and save a copy of the message to that folder
(in this case ``myfolder'').

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00265000000000000000">
The News Article Composition Window</A>
</H2>

<P>
This window is essentially identical to the mail composition window
(<A HREF="#MailCompositionWindow"><IMG  ALIGN="BOTTOM" BORDER="1" ALT="[*]" SRC="crossref.png"></A>), but instead of specifying a mail address
to send the message to, you can enter one or more newsgroups names
(comma separated). The newsserver used depends on from where this
window was opened, if it was opened while reading a specific newgroup,
it will use the same newsserver that the newsgroup was read from,
otherwise it will fall back to the setting in the global preferences.

<P>

<H1><A NAME="SECTION00270000000000000000">
Message Templates</A>
</H1>

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00271000000000000000">
What are they?</A>
</H2>

<P>
Mahogany uses the message templates to initialize the text of the new message
whenever you start composing a new mail message or reply to or forward an
existing one. By default, the standard templates are used which are empty for
the "new mail" and "new article" and have some reasonable default values for
the "reply", "forward" and "follow up". However you may define an arbitrary
number of additional templates and also modify the standard ones using the
<TT>"Edit|Templates..."</TT> menu command.

<P>
Beyond customizing the standard templates to suit your tastes, it is also often
useful to define additional templates for the messages you write often. For
example, a system administrator could have some ready to use reply templates
for answering the standard user questions and so on. If you create new
templates, it is convenient to use the <TT>Shift-Ctrl-&lt;X&gt;</TT> versions of the
usual commands, i.e. instead of using <TT>F</TT> in the folder view to forward
a message you may use <TT>Shift-Ctrl-F</TT> to choose the template first. The
same applies to the other commands.

<P>
When you edit the templates in the dialog, most of the functionality is
accessible via the right click menu in the control containing the template
text, however it may sometimes be necessary to edit the templates by hand so
the next section gives a brief description of their syntax.

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00272000000000000000">
Templates syntax</A>
</H2>

<P>
First of all, any normal text appearing in the template will be copied as is to
the text of the new message. Special constructions are introduced by the
<SPAN  CLASS="textit">variable expansion</SPAN>, that is anything starting with the dollar sign
(<TT>$</TT>). The general syntax of a variable expansion is the following:
<DIV ALIGN="CENTER">
</DIV><PRE>
$([category:]name[?arguments][{+|-|=}&lt;number&gt;[!]])
</PRE>
<DIV ALIGN="CENTER">
</DIV>
(the parentheses around all this may be replaced with braces). For the
simplest cases (no category, no arguments, no justficiation tail) the
parentheses may be omitted entirely, as in <TT>$DATE</TT>.

<P>
The possible values of <SPAN  CLASS="textit">category</SPAN> and <SPAN  CLASS="textit">name</SPAN> are described below.
Both of them are "words", i.e. are sequences of alphabetic characters. The
category also may be implied by using the special brackets: <TT>$`...`</TT>
implies the category <TT>"cmd"</TT>, i.e. executes the command specified inside
the single quotes and <TT>$&lt;...&lt;</TT> implies the category <TT>"file"</TT>
(both of these shortcuts come from standard Unix shell notations).

<P>
The arguments are optional and if they are present are either a
comma-separated list of words (i.e. alphabetic characters only are allowed)
or another variable expansion. For example, the following will insert
the quoted contents of the file after asking the user for a file name
defaulting to foo.bar:
<DIV ALIGN="CENTER">
</DIV><PRE>
$(file:foo.bar?ASK,QUOTE)
</PRE>
<DIV ALIGN="CENTER">
</DIV>
and this example will set the value of the specified header as expected:
<DIV ALIGN="CENTER">
</DIV><PRE>
$(header:X-UnixName?$`whoami`)
</PRE>
<DIV ALIGN="CENTER">
</DIV>

<P>
Finally, the optional tail <TT>{+|-|=}&lt;number&gt;</TT> may be used to justify
the value: <TT>"+"</TT> aligns it to the right, <TT>"-"</TT> (which is default)
to the left and <TT>"="</TT> centers it in the text field of width
<SPAN  CLASS="textit">number</SPAN>. If the number is followed by <TT>"!"</TT>, the value is
truncated if it doesn't fit into the given width instead of taking as much
place as is required for it as it does by default.

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00273000000000000000">
Template variables</A>
</H2>

<P>
After the description of the general syntax in the previous section, here are
the possible values for the category and name parameter mentioned above:

<P>

<H3><A NAME="SECTION00273100000000000000">
Unnamed category</A>
</H3>

<P>
This category contains the most commonly used variables and allows to write
them in the shortest possible form, i.e. without any parentheses or braces
around them and without the category name. The names in this category are:

<UL>
<LI>date Inserts the current date in the configured format (see the
      "Configure format for displaying dates" button in the "Message view" page
      of the options dialog).
</LI>
<LI>cursor This is a special variable: its expansion is empty and instead
      it has the effect of positioning the cursor at the place where it appears
      in the template when the template expansion is done.
</LI>
<LI>to Shortcut for <TT>${original:to}</TT>
</LI>
<LI>cc Shortcut for <TT>${original:cc}</TT>
</LI>
<LI>subject Shortcut for <TT>${original:subject}</TT>
</LI>
<LI>quote Inserts the contents of the message being replied to or
      forwarded as text. Not valid in new mail or article templates.
</LI>
<LI>quote822 Inserts the contents of the original message as an
      attachment - unlike the previous variable, this allows to insert the
      original message with all the attachments it contains in the new message.
</LI>
<LI>text Same as <TT>$quote</TT> but inserts the original text without
      quoting it, i.e. without quotation marks in front of each line.
</LI>
<LI>sender Expands to the sender address.
</LI>
<LI>signature Expands to the text of your currently configured signature.
</LI>
</UL>

<P>

<H3><A NAME="SECTION00273200000000000000">
Message category</A>
</H3>

<P>
The <TT>"message:"</TT> prefix gives access to the headers of the message being
composed. It allows to use the same message template for composing messages to
different people, for example, by reusing the value of <TT>To:</TT> header in
the message text. It has the following variables:

<P>

<UL>
<LI>to
</LI>
<LI>cc
</LI>
<LI>bcc
</LI>
<LI>subject
</LI>
<LI>firstname
</LI>
<LI>lastname
</LI>
</UL>

<P>

<H3><A NAME="SECTION00273300000000000000">
Original message category</A>
</H3>

<P>
The category <TT>"original:"</TT> gives access to the message being forwarded
or replied to. Accordingly, you can't use this category in the templates for
the new messages.

<P>

<UL>
<LI>date
</LI>
<LI>from
</LI>
<LI>subject
</LI>
<LI>fullname
</LI>
<LI>firstname
</LI>
<LI>lastname
</LI>
<LI>to
</LI>
<LI>cc
</LI>
<LI>replyto
</LI>
<LI>newsgroups
</LI>
<LI>domain
</LI>
<LI>header
</LI>
</UL>

<P>

<H3><A NAME="SECTION00273400000000000000">
File category</A>
</H3>

<P>
The <TT>"file:"</TT> category doesn't contain any fixed names, instead it
allows you to insert the named file in the message text by using (full) path to
it as <SPAN  CLASS="textit">name</SPAN>. There are two arguments: <TT>ask</TT> and <TT>quote</TT>.
The first will ask the user for the file to insert during the template
expansion (with default being the file name in the template) and the second one
will insert the file prepending a quote marker before each of its lines.

<P>

<H3><A NAME="SECTION00273500000000000000">
Attach category</A>
</H3>

<P>
The <TT>"attach:"</TT> category is very similar to the <TT>"file:"</TT> one,
the only difference being that the contents of the file is attached and not
inserted as text. It also supports <TT>ask</TT> but not <TT>quote</TT>
arguments as the latter doesn't make sense for attachments.

<P>

<H3><A NAME="SECTION00273600000000000000">
Command category</A>
</H3>

<P>
Like the two previous one, this category doesn't have any standard names
neither. The syntax <TT>"cmd:<SPAN  CLASS="textit">name</SPAN>"</TT> allows to execute an external
command <SPAN  CLASS="textit">name</SPAN> and insert its output in the message text. The template
arguments are passed to the command as command line parameters.

<P>

<H3><A NAME="SECTION00273700000000000000">
Python category</A>
</H3>

<P>
Very similar to the previous category, this one allows to execute arbitrary
Python scripts. The syntax is <TT>"python:<TT>function</TT>"</TT> and you may
additional string arguments which will be passed to the function.

<P>
Possibility to use Python functions allows to do almost anything in the message
expansion. For example, to use different signatures in replies to different
people all you have to do is to append <TT>"${python:sig?$to}"</TT> at the
end of your reply template and add a Python function like this to your
<TT>Minit.py</TT> file:
<PRE>
   def sig(to):
      if to == "someone@some.where":
         return "Hello someone!"
      elif to == "someoneelse@...":
         return "Goodbye someone else"
      else # general case
         return "No special signature for you, sorry"
</PRE>

<P>

<H3><A NAME="SECTION00273800000000000000">
Header category</A>
</H3>

<P>
Using <TT>"header:"</TT> category you can <SPAN  CLASS="textit">change</SPAN> the values of the
headers of the new message. This is mostly useful in the templates for the
messages which are always sent to the same addressee as then you don't have to
enter it manually each time. The <SPAN  CLASS="textit">name</SPAN> is the name of the header to set
and the (only allowed) argument is its value. Any header names, standard or
not, can be used.

<P>

<H1><A NAME="SECTION00280000000000000000">
Understanding program options</A>
</H1>

<P>
One of the goals of the Mahogany project is to be as configurable
as possible. Of course, it means that Mahogany has a lot of options
- however we hope that it doesn't make the program more difficult
to use because you have the complete liberty to ignore all options
until you need to use them. Moreover, many program options are completely
transparent to the user because they are automatically remembered
by the program. All the other ones may be changed from the main options
dialog which may be invoked from the <TT>"Edit"</TT> menu of any window.

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00281000000000000000"></A><A NAME="optionshighlight"></A>
<BR>
Hierarchical options organization
</H2>

<P>
Before starting to change options, it is important to understand that Mahogany
configuration settings are inherited in a logical fashion. The settings in the
preferences dialog are the global default settings and can be overridden on a
per-folder basis. The top level folders in the tree use by default the same
global options but you may also edit each folders options via
<TT>"Folder|Properties..."</TT> menu item. Subfolders inherit from their
parent folders and, again, you can change their options independently.

<P>
To make visualizing this mechanism easier, the names of the options with non
default values are highlighted in the options dialog. Those whose values are
set at the level of the folder currently being edited are shown in bright
blue, while those which inherit values from the parent folder are shown in
darker shade of blue. Of coourse, this behaviour in itself is customizable and
the colours may be changed (or disabled completely) in the ``Miscellaneous''
page of the options dialog (<A HREF="#miscellaneouspage"><IMG  ALIGN="BOTTOM" BORDER="1" ALT="[*]" SRC="crossref.png"></A>).

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00282000000000000000">
Automatically remembered options</A>
</H2>

<P>
These options include the sizes and the positions of all windows,
the texts of all prompts, the positions of splitters in the main program
window and the other folder views as well as several other things.
These options are special in that they do not appear in the options
dialog and so can not be changed directly - instead Mahogany remembers
them each time it is shut down, so when it is reopened it will be
in exactly the same state as during the last run. Try to play with
it: adjust the sizes of the main program window and the splitters
in it as you like, exit Mahogany and restart it (this is for testing
only, of course, you do not need to do it each time!) - you should
see that the window reappears on the same position (although this
might not work under some window managers), has the same size and
is split in the same manner.

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00283000000000000000">
Other options</A>
</H2>

<P>
All other options except those mentioned in the previous subsection
can be changed from the program options dialog. This dialog has several
pages which are described in more details below:

<P>

<H3><A NAME="SECTION00283100000000000000">
Identity page</A>
</H3>

<P>
<A NAME="IdentityPage"></A><P>
Here several important settings are configured, so it is advised (as
the program itself will tell you when it is run for the first time)
to set them up before starting using Mahogany. These include your
personal identity settings - see also your preferred mail and news
servers which is configured from the network page (<A HREF="#NetworkPage"><IMG  ALIGN="BOTTOM" BORDER="1" ALT="[*]" SRC="crossref.png"></A>).

<P>

<UL>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Personal name</SPAN>
<BR>
Your full personal name to be included in your address. This field is free
form. It is not mandatory but should normally be set.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Organization</SPAN>
<BR>
This field is optional and may be filled with the name of the organization you
work in. If it is non empty, an appropriate header is automatically added to
all outgoing messages.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">User name or login</SPAN>
<BR>
This is used as (default) login name for the accounts which require
one (POP3 or IMAP4) and also as the base for the return address unless
it is overridden by explicit setting of the email address below. This field is
mandatory and is usually a single word.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">E-mail address</SPAN>
<BR>
Your primary address (others can be used if needed). It is used as the default
value of "From:" header and should be set correctly if you want to get replies
to your mail.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Reply address</SPAN> 
<BR>
Here you can specify a return mail address if it is different from the email
address above. Usually this is not needed.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Domain</SPAN> 
<BR>
This is used as the default domain for local addresses.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Set "From:" header from "To:" field</SPAN>
<BR>
If set, Mahogany will use the original <TT>To:</TT> address field
values for the <TT>From:</TT> header entry of any message replies
that you send. This makes sure that the same person sending you mail
will always see the same mail address for you. It is especially useful,
if you collect mail from several different incoming mail folders.
An example: Someone sends you mail to <TT>John.Doe@mycompany.com</TT>.
If you reply to this message, it will appear as coming from <TT>John.Doe@mycompany.com</TT>,
even if you read this mail from home, on a machine called <TT>MyBox.fun.org</TT>.
On the other hand, if someone sends you mail to <TT>MyAlias@writeme.com</TT>,
your reply will carry that as a return address, so that person will
never know about your <TT>mycompany.com</TT> office address. Notice that for
this option to work correctly, you should enter all addresses you usually
receive mail from in the "Addresses" options page (<A HREF="#AddressesPage"><IMG  ALIGN="BOTTOM" BORDER="1" ALT="[*]" SRC="crossref.png"></A>).
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">And add personal name if needed</SPAN>
<BR>
This option only makes sense if the above one is true and if it is set, then
your personal name will be used if the recipient address didn't contain it.
</LI>
</UL>

<P>
<A NAME="NetworkPage"></A><P>
This page allows you to configure the network-related settings. Please
notice that the four server names (for POP3, IMAP4, SMTP and NNTP)
are only the default values and that Mahogany can use as many different
servers (in particular, POP3 and NNTP) as you wish - for this, it
is just enough to change the server name when creating a new folder
from the default value specified here.

<P>

<UL>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">POP server</SPAN>
<BR>
This is the default server for your POP3 mail folders.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">IMAP server</SPAN>
<BR>
This is the default server for your IMAP mail folders.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">SMTP server</SPAN>
<BR>
This is the server used for sending outgoing mail, please ask your
system administrator if you don't know its name. This option is disabled
if ``Use local mail transfer agent'' is checked.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">NNTP server</SPAN>
<BR>
This is the server used for reading USENET newsgroups and posting
news articles.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">TCP Timeout Values</SPAN>
<BR>
These timeouts are used for all accesses to remote servers. Generally
it is a good idea to set them to small values to avoid unnecessary
delays if something goes wrong. On the other hand, you want to make
sure that they are long enough for slow connections, like for example
through a modem line. If you get a lot of error messages about failed
accesses to remote servers, you should try to increase these settings.

<P>

<UL>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">TCP Open Timeout</SPAN> 
<BR>
This setting decides after how many seconds the attempt to open a
connection to a remote mail or newsserver will time out. I.e. if no
connection can be made within this time interval, the request will
fail.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">TCP Write Timeout</SPAN> 
<BR>
If the attempt to write data to a remote server takes longer than
this, it will fail.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">TCP Read Timeout</SPAN> 
<BR>
If the attempt to read data from a remote server takes longer than
this, it will fail.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">TCP Close Timeout</SPAN> 
<BR>
If the attempt to close the connection to a remote server takes longer
than this, it will fail.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">TCP Rsh Timeout</SPAN> 
<BR>
If the attempt to open a remote shell connection (used for some mail
operations) to a remote server takes longer than this, it will fail.
</LI>
</UL>
</LI>
</UL>

<P>

<H3><A NAME="SECTION00283200000000000000"></A><A NAME="NewMailPage"></A>
<BR>
New Mail Page
</H3>

<P>
This page looks slightly differently in the global preferences dialog
and in the folder properties one as some of the settings here must
be the same for all folders while the others can only be set for a
specific folder. First here is the list of the settings which appear
in the global dialog:

<P>

<UL>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Execute new mail command</SPAN>
<BR>
You may specify a command to execute when new mail is received.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Play a sound on new mail</SPAN>
<BR>
You can select a sound file to be played on new mail reception.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Show new mail notification</SPAN>
<BR>
If this option is on, Mahogany will show a message about the new mail
in the log window
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Ping folder interval</SPAN>
<BR>
This setting specifies how often should the currently opened folder(s)
be updated. It is typically smaller than the poll interval below because
it is faster to check an already opened folder, especially when it
is a remote folder.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Poll interval</SPAN>
<BR>
How often should Mahogany update the mail folders which it monitors
in the background
</LI>
</UL>
In addition to these settings, the folder ``New Mail'' properties
page also proposes you the following settings:

<P>

<UL>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Configure filters</SPAN>
<BR>
This button gives you access to the filters dialog. Please see the
corresponding manual section (<A HREF="#Filters"><IMG  ALIGN="BOTTOM" BORDER="1" ALT="[*]" SRC="crossref.png"></A>) for more details
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Collect new mail from this folder</SPAN>
<BR>
If checked, all new mail detected in this folder (either automatically
or manually) not handled by the filters will be copied or moved to
another folder, normally the central ``New Mail'' folder. You
may change the destination folder if you are in advanced user mode.
Of course, copying the new mail to a local folder from remote server
may be time consuming so it may be worth to set the filters deleting
the unwanted spam messages for this folder to avoid downloading them.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Leave mail in this folder</SPAN>
<BR>
If this checkbox is checked, the new mail will be copied to the ``New
Mail'' folder and also left in this folder. Otherwise it will be
moved to ``New Mail'' and deleted from this folder.
<BR>
This option is often called ``Leave mail on server'' in the
other email clients.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Permanently monitor this folder</SPAN>
<BR>
Choose this to tell Mahogany to poll this folder in the background
periodically (the interval may be set below). If you leave it unset,
you can still trigger new mail detection (including applying filters
to it and/or downloading it from server) by either opening the folder
or updating it (``Open'' and ``Update'' commands in the
``Folder'' manu respectively)
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Poll folder at startup</SPAN>
<BR>
If on, Mahogany will check for new mail in this folder immediately
after the program launch. Of course, if you have many permanently
monitored folders this can make the program startup quite slow.
</LI>
</UL>

<P>

<H3><A NAME="SECTION00283300000000000000"></A><A NAME="ComposePage"></A>
<BR>
Compose Page 
</H3>

<P>
On this page you may configure different settings which control the
behaviour of the message composer (it is also used when replying or
forwarding mail messages, not only for composing the new ones).

<P>

<UL>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Save sent messages</SPAN>
<BR>
If enabled, Mahogany will keep a copy of each message you send.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Folder file for sent messages</SPAN>
<BR>
Where you want Mahogany to save the copies of sent messages.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Wrap margin</SPAN>
<BR>
If set to a value greater than zero, the message editor will wrap
lines for you at that margin. It is recommended to set it at number
less than 75, otherwise the lines in your mail messages might become
too long to be conveniently read.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Reply string in subject</SPAN>
<BR>
The prefix for subject lines in message replies, usually set to ``Re:``
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Collapse reply marker</SPAN>
<BR>
Mahogany can collapse multiple reply markers (such as ``Re:``)
into one in three different ways:

<P>

<UL>
<LI>no : do not collapse reply markers
</LI>
<LI>collapse : collapse them into one
</LI>
<LI>count : collapse them into one and add a counter for the reply level,
such as ``Re[2]:``
</LI>
</UL>
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Quote character</SPAN>
<BR>
The text inserted before each line of the quoted message when replying.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Use signature</SPAN>
<BR>
If enabled, Mahogany will append the contents of your signature file
to each message sent.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Use signature separator</SPAN>
<BR>
If enabled, your signature will be separated from the text with two
dashes. This is a common Internet/Usenet convention.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Use XFace</SPAN>
<BR>
XFaces are small black and white bitmaps which can be added to the
message header to identify the sender. Mahogany will recognise and
display them if enabled. It will also attempt to load your XFace from
the file specified and send it with messages you write. If you do
not have your own XFace file, Mahogany will use its own default XFace.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">XFace file</SPAN>
<BR>
This file must contain a 48x48 pixel black and white image. Most image
formats should be recognised, XPM is recommended. If the file cannot
be loaded, the default XFace will be substituted.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Mail alias substring expansion</SPAN>
<BR>
If enabled, the EXPAND button will search the mail address databases
using substring search rather than just comparing the text against
the beginning of addresses and aliases. Produces many more matches
than the default search and might take a bit longer.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Font family, font sizes, foreground colour, background colour</SPAN>
<BR>
These settings determine the appearance of the composition window's
message editor.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Configure headers</SPAN>
<BR>
Allows you to specify default values for the To:, CC: and BCC: fields
and whether to display them in the compose view or not. Hint: you
may want to configure the folder where you collect all messages from
some person (or the mailing list) to have this persons reply address
default value for the ``To:`` field.
<BR>
<BR>
The dialog shown will also allow you to edit the custom headers for
outgoing messages (i.e. add arbitrary additional headers) if the user
level (<A HREF="#UserLevel"><IMG  ALIGN="BOTTOM" BORDER="1" ALT="[*]" SRC="crossref.png"></A>) is set to ``Advanced''.
</LI>
</UL>

<P>

<H3><A NAME="SECTION00283400000000000000">
Folders page</A>
</H3>

<P>

<UL>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Folders to open on startup</SPAN>
<BR>
Mahogany will open these folders on program startup.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Folder opened in main frame</SPAN>
<BR>
This specifies the folder to open in the main frame on program startup.
It will be automatically remembered each time you exit Mahogany.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Poll for new mail delay</SPAN>
<BR>
Mahogany will check all incoming mailboxes for new mail. Specify the
time between checks in seconds here. Notice that each check causes
a short delay as Mahogany polls the folders, set it to a longer value
to reduce the annoying screen updates, set it to a shorter value if
you care about receiving your new mail with little delay.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Ping/check folder interval in seconds</SPAN>
<BR>
Mahogany checks periodically whether the opened folders are still
``alive'' (a folder may become dead if, for example, the remote
server goes down or the network link fails).
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Automatically select first message in viewer</SPAN>
<BR>
If enabled, Mahogany will automatically select and display the first
message in the message viewer whenever you open a folder. This can
be inconvenient if you want to just look at headers without downloading
messages over a slow link.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Threshold for displaying progress dialog</SPAN>
<BR>
Mahogany will display progress dialogs when parsing mail folders or
querying servers. If the number of messages is less than this threshold
value, the progress dialog will be suppressed - play with this setting
and set it to the value which doesn't show the progress dialogs which
disappear too quickly, but still shows them if the operation lasts
a long time.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Create "folder internal data" message</SPAN>
<BR>
Mahogany normally creates hidden message entitled "don't delete this
message - folder internal data" to store its private data. This is done
only with Unix mailbox and MMDF formats, because other formats have
built-in mechanisms for storing folder properties. This allows Mahogany
to provide extra functionality, but it confuses new mail notification
programs and it looks ugly in mail software that doesn't support it.
Unchecking this option prevents Mahogany from creating new such messages
and you can delete previously created messages using text editor. Keep
in mind many other programs can create such messages and this option
applies only to Mahogany.
</LI>
</UL>

<P>

<H3><A NAME="SECTION00283500000000000000"></A><A NAME="PythonOptions"></A>
<BR>
Python page
</H3>

<P>
(This page is only present if you have a Python-enabled version of Mahogany)

<P>

<UL>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Enable Python</SPAN>
<BR>
Enables the built-in python interpreter which can be used to extend
Mahogany. It is not essential for normal operation, but if you want
to do unusual things, python gives you the power to do practically
anything you want with the program.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Python DLL</SPAN>
<BR>
This option is only present if Mahogany is configured to load Python
interpreter from a shared library (also known as DLL under Windows).
You should only use it if you have Python DLL installed in a non standard
location where Mahogany can't find it or if you have several Python versions
installed and you want to use a different one from the one Mahogany
automatically detects.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Python Path</SPAN>
<BR>
Where to search for python files.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Startup script</SPAN>
<BR>
The name of a python script which will be executed at program startup.
</LI>
</UL>

<P>

<H4><A NAME="SECTION00283510000000000000">
Callbacks</A>
</H4>

<P>
Callbacks are python functions that can be called from different parts
of Mahogany's code. See the section <A HREF="#pythonhooks"><IMG  ALIGN="BOTTOM" BORDER="1" ALT="[*]" SRC="crossref.png"></A> for more information on
this.

<P>

<UL>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Folder open callback</SPAN>
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Folder update callback</SPAN>
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Folder expunge callback</SPAN>
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Flag set callback</SPAN>
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Flag clear callback</SPAN>
</LI>
</UL>

<P>

<H3><A NAME="SECTION00283600000000000000">
Message Viewer</A>
</H3>

<P>

<UL>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf"><A NAME="MessageViewerPage"></A>Preview message when selected</SPAN>
<BR>
When this option is set, any message that gets selected in the list
of messages will get pre-viewed automatically. If using a modem connection,
it makes sense to disable it, so messages will only get loaded and
pre-viewed when double-clicked upon or when the 'V' key is pressed.
By default, this is enabled, so that clicking on a message or pressing
the spacebar to select it, will also pre-view it.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Font family, font size, foreground colour, background colour,
colour for URLs, colour for header names, colour for header values</SPAN>
<BR>
These settings control the appearance of messages in the message viewer
window. Mahogany will detect URLs embedded in messages and by using
a different colour for them, can highlight them. When the user clicks
on a URL, it will be opened in an external browser.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Inline graphics</SPAN>
<BR>
If enabled, Mahogany will display images included as MIME content
in the message window. If disabled, images will be represented by
a filetype icon like any other MIME content.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Conversion graphics format</SPAN>
<BR>
Mahogany uses an external conversion program (<A HREF="#HelpersPage"><IMG  ALIGN="BOTTOM" BORDER="1" ALT="[*]" SRC="crossref.png"></A>)
for image formats which it does not support natively. Here you can
chose one of the natively supported formats to use for the conversion.
At present, the most reliable format appears to be XPM. If configured
properly and all libraries are available, Mahogany should support
XPM, PNG, JPEG and BMP. Notice that XPM files are extremely large,
so you might want to change this setting to one of the other formats.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Support special fax mailers</SPAN>
<BR>
This enables support for domains sending faxes by email, such as the
<A NAME="tex2html7"
  HREF="http://www.efax.com/">EFAX</A>
fax to email gateway.
Faxes are sent as MIME attachments and need treatment different from
normal images.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Domains sending faxes</SPAN>
<BR>
This is a colon-separated list of domains sending faxes. All IMAGE/TIFF
or APPLICATION/OCTET-STREAM MIME content in mails coming from these
domains will be treated as TIFF-G3 faxes. Note that the strings in
this field do not need to be real domain names but are substrings
looked for in the sender's email address.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Maximum size of message</SPAN>
<BR>
If you attempt to view a message larger than this limit, Mahogany
will prompt you for confirmation. This is to prevent you from accidentally
downloading large messages over a slow remote connection. Setting
it to 0 will disable this. The limit is not applied to mailfolder
files.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Maximum number of messages</SPAN>
<BR>
If you open a folder with more than this limit of messages, Mahogany
will ask you whether you want to limit the amount of messages downloaded
(or partially downloaded). Again, this is to prevent you from accidentally
downloading huge numbers of messages over a slow remote connection.
Setting it to 0 disables this. It does not apply to mailfolder files.
Also, for NNTP connections, this might be triggered although there
could be less messages in the newsgroup, as at the time of testing
the number of unread messages is not know yet.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Configure headers to show</SPAN>
<BR>
This allows you to chose from a list of the most commonly viewed header
lines, which you would like to display together with the message contents.
By default, To:, From:, Subject: and Date: are shown. Note that you
can always view the complete header information or the raw message
text, no matter what you chose here.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Configure Date Format</SPAN>
<BR>
This will pop up a sub-dialog (<A HREF="#date_format_dialog"><IMG  ALIGN="BOTTOM" BORDER="1" ALT="[*]" SRC="crossref.png"></A>) for setting
the format for displaying dates.
</LI>
</UL>

<P>

<H3><A NAME="SECTION00283700000000000000">
Addresses page</A>
</H3>

<P>
Mahogany may automatically remember all addresses from all e-mail
messages you receive (actually, only those which you read). This is
called <SPAN  CLASS="textit">address autocollection</SPAN> and, as almost any other feature
of Mahogany can be turned on and off as desired. In this page you
may choose whether you want to use this feature at all (it is on by
default) and, if so, where should be the autocollected addresses be
put and other settings. See the Addressbook section (<A HREF="#AddressDatabase"><IMG  ALIGN="BOTTOM" BORDER="1" ALT="[*]" SRC="crossref.png"></A>)
for more information on Mahogany's built-in addressbook.

<P>

<UL>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Address to replace with "To"</SPAN>
<BR>
The addresses in this listbox are considered to be your own addresses. It is
not necessary to add the primary email address here but you can add as many of
other addresses as needed. You can use the <TT>*</TT> wildcard in the
addresses here to stand for any number of arbitrary characters.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Mailing list addresses</SPAN>
<BR>
If the "Reply to list" command doesn't work you should enter the mailing list
address here. Normally this is not necessary as modern mailing list software
usually identifies itself correctly in the message headers anyhow.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Autocollect addresses</SPAN>
<BR>
You may choose ``No'' to disable autocollecting addresses completely,
or choose ``Yes'' to always autocollect them. The remaining
option, ``Ask'', means that you will be presented with a message
box each time an address is about to be autocollected.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Address book to use</SPAN>
<BR>
You may enter the path of the address book to use for autocollected
addresses. Although you may use any address book for this, it is probably
better to have a special address book for all autocollected addresses.
If the path name given here is an absolute one, it is used as is.
Otherwise, it is considered to be relative to your Mahogany directory.
For example, the default for this option is ``autocollect.adb''
and so the default autocollect book will be created in 
<BR>$HOME/.M/<SMALL>AUTOCOLLECT.ADB</SMALL> 
<BR>
under Unix.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Collect addresses in outgoing mail</SPAN>
<BR>
If autocollection is activated above and this option is checked, the addresses
in the outgoing mail will be automatically collected as well.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Ignore addresses without names</SPAN>
<BR>
You may with to autocollect only addresses which have a full name
- in this case you should check this option. If it is off and the
address has no name, the first part of e-mail address (the one preceding
the '@' symbol) will be used instead of the name.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Whitelist</SPAN>
<BR>
Spam filter option "No match in whitelist" uses this address book.
</LI>
</UL>

<P>
In addition to its own built-in addressbook format, Mahogany also
supports the addressbook files of the BBDB addressbook used with Emacs
(see <A HREF="#BBDB"><IMG  ALIGN="BOTTOM" BORDER="1" ALT="[*]" SRC="crossref.png"></A>). Some settings can be set here which apply only
to the BBDB addressbook support:

<P>

<UL>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Ignore entries without names</SPAN>
<BR>
BBDB can store entries which have only an e-mail address with them,
but no name. If you set this option, Mahogany will discard such entries.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Generate unique aliases</SPAN>
<BR>
Setting this option allows Mahogany to ensure that all aliases are
unique. If two entries have the same alias, one of them will be modified
to distinguish them. This is especially useful in conjuction with
the following option. If this option is set, reading in of BBDB addressbooks
is slowed down considerably. However, setting it once, then saving
the addressbook and disabling it, will make sure that all aliases
are unique without slowing down subsequent loading of the addressbook
the next time it is used.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Name for nameless entries</SPAN>
<BR>
If Mahogany finds entries without a name and is not set to ignore
it, this name will be used for such entries. It can be combined with
the option to generate unique aliases.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Save on exit</SPAN>
<BR>
As saving BBDB addressbook can potentially lead to some loss of information
in the original database file (BBDB and Mahogany support different
fields), you can choose whether you want Mahogany to automatically
save the data on exit or ask you for confirmation. Read section <A HREF="#BBDB"><IMG  ALIGN="BOTTOM" BORDER="1" ALT="[*]" SRC="crossref.png"></A>
for more details about how BBDB and Mahogany differ in interpreting
the database.
</LI>
</UL>

<P>

<H4><A NAME="SECTION00283710000000000000">
Helpers</A>
</H4>

<P>
<A NAME="HelpersPage"></A>On this page you can customise which external
helper applications Mahogany uses for different action that it does
not perform itself.

<P>

<UL>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Open URLs with</SPAN>
<BR>
Mahogany will use the program listed here to open URLs embedded in
email messages. If you want to use Lynx as your Web browser you should
prefix it with ``xterm -e'' under Unix in order to open Lynx
in a separate window. For example, you may use <SMALL>XTERM -T </SMALL>L<SMALL>YNX
-E </SMALL>L<SMALL>YNX.</SMALL>
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">URL browser is Netscape</SPAN>
<BR>
If the browser used to open URLs belongs to the family of Netscape
programs, tick this box. Instead of calling a new browser each time,
Mahogany will tell the already running Netscape process to load the
new URL. Also, don't forget to clear it if you use another browser
- otherwise it will fail to start up.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Help viewer</SPAN>
<BR>
The program listed here will be used to view the online help system
in HTML format. Any simple HTML viewer can be used here.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Help viewer is Netscape</SPAN>
<BR>
Just like the option for the URL browser, this will take talk to an
already running Netscape process instead of opening a new one each
time.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">External editor</SPAN>
<BR>
This is the external editor which will be invoked if you choose ``External
editor...'' from the compose view menu. You should use the ``%s''
characters to indicate the place where the file name will be inserted
in the command line (if you don't do it, an implicit ``%s''
will be added to the end of the string).
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">New Mail Command</SPAN>
<BR>
The line in this field will be executed whenever Mahogany receives
new mail. This can be used to play a sound to notify the user of incoming
messages, or do something else to alert him.
</LI>
</UL>

<P>

<H3><A NAME="SECTION00283800000000000000"></A><A NAME="miscellaneouspage"></A>
<BR>
Miscellaneous
</H3>

<P>
All options which don't fit in any other pages are collected here.

<P>

<UL>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Show log window</SPAN>
<BR>
If this option is on, the log window showing all program messages
will be displayed during program execution. It is advised to leave
it on because the log messages (which can be saved to a file from
the log window menu) can be valuable for the bug reports.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Debug server and mail folder access</SPAN><A NAME="debugoption"></A>
<BR>
This is another troubleshooting option: please turn it on if you experience
any mail-related problems (either sending or receiving). It slows
down the program a lot but allows to see what exactly is going on
between the client and the server and this can be of great help sometimes.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Splash screen on startup</SPAN>
<BR>
If this option is on, a splash screen is shown on startup. It will
go away when clicked with the mouse or when a given delay (see the
next item) expires.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Splash screen delay</SPAN>
<BR>
The delay after which the splash screen disappears.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Autosave delay</SPAN>
<BR>
This option allows to automatically save all program settings (but
not messages being composed so far) each time the given delay (in
seconds) passes. It can be disabled by setting the delay to 0, but
it is advised to leave it enabled - so that your changes to the program
configuration will be always saved.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Confirm exit</SPAN>
<BR>
If this options is on, you will be asked whether you want to leave
the program each time before exiting. The checkbox on the message
box with this question can be used to change the value of this option
as well.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Click folder to open<A NAME="clicktoopen"></A></SPAN>
<BR>
If this option is on, it is enough to select (for example, by clicking
on it) a folder in the folder tree control in the main window to open
it in the integrated folder view. Double clicking the folder or choosing
``Open'' from the popup menu will open folder in a separate
window. This approach has a drawback of being a little slow with either
very big folders or on slow machines/network connections, so an alternative
way is to uncheck this checkbox. Then double clicking a folder will
be needed to open it in the integrated folder view - while ``Open''
popup menu item will still open it in a separate window.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Always run only one instance</SPAN><A NAME="onlyoneinstance"></A>
<BR>
If this option is on and you launch another instance of Mahogany, i.e. execute
it again while another copy of it is still running, the control will be given
to the already running instance instead of launching another one in parallel.

<P>
This is especially useful when Mahogany is configured as your default mail
client as otherwise another copy of it would have to be opened each time when
you start writing a new message.

<P>
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Show option values origin</SPAN>
<BR>
This item controls highlighting of the names of the options which have non
default values. It is on by default.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Colour for options set here</SPAN>
<BR>
Only used if the option above is on and allows to choose the colour used for
highlighting the options set at this folder level.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Colour for inherited options</SPAN>
<BR>
Same as the option above but for the options which have inherited their (non
default) value from their parent folder.

<P>
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Show new mail notification</SPAN>
<BR>
If this option is on, a message box will be shown each time new messages
are received.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Path where to find AFM files</SPAN> (Unix version only)
<BR>
To properly scale printing under Unix, Mahogany needs access to a
set of AFM files. The searchpath where to look for them can be modified
here.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Remote configuration synchronisation settings</SPAN>
<BR>
Please refer to the section below for a detailed explanation.
</LI>
</UL>

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00284000000000000000">
Remote configuration synchronisation</A>
</H2>

<P>
Mahogany can automatically save a subset of its configuration settings
in a mailbox at program exit and automatically retrieve that information
the next time it is started up. This option becomes useful if you
are using the program from different systems, e.g. if sometimes from
the office and some other times from home over a dialup link. In this
case, you can save some settings in a special IMAP folder and tell
the program to use this for some of the settings. Like that, you can
share the program settings no matter from where you run Mahogany and
you do not need to manually adjust both configurations.

<P>
To use this option, first create a folder on an IMAP server. Do not
use a POP3 server, as the program cannot store information via POP3,
IMAP is required for this to work. Then, activate the ``Sync options
with remote server'' setting and choose which settings you wish
to share. Currently supported are:

<P>

<UL>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Sync Filter Rules</SPAN>: This keeps the global list of all filter
rules synchronised via the IMAP folder. Very useful if you want to
use the same set of filter rules no matter where you run Mahogany.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Sync Identities</SPAN>: This keeps the list of available identity
settings synchronised. Be careful: some things such as server settings
might cause problems if they are used on a machine with different
network settings.
</LI>
<LI><SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Sync part of the folder tree</SPAN>: This allows you to synchronise
a complete sub-tree of the mailbox/folder tree. Activate this and
pick a group of folders from the tree (Click on the [&gt;&gt;]
button to choose one.) and this tree of folders will be available
no matter from where you run Mahogany. Note: this only makes sense
if the folder group contains networked folders which are accessible
from both machines. It synchronises configuration information, not
folder contents. So you cannot access a mailbox file residing on one
machine via this mechanism, but you can share configuration entries
for remote mailboxes, such as IMAP, POP3 or newsgroups.
</LI>
</UL>

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00285000000000000000">
Some Other Dialogs You May Encounter</A>
</H2>

<P>

<H3><A NAME="SECTION00285100000000000000">
Date Format</A>
</H3>

<P>
<A NAME="date_format_dialog"></A>The dates of messages for the list of headers
can be displayed in a format of your choice. The same format is used
for inserting the current date in templates when writing messages.
The format of the date is controlled by a list of format specifiers
(as accepted by the <TT>strftime()</TT> function in the c-library).
Most of the available format specifiers are available via a little
popup menu which appears if you press the right-mouse button in the
input field.

<P>

<H4><A NAME="SECTION00285110000000000000">
Display time in GMT/UST</A>
</H4>

<P>
If you tick this box, all times will be displayed in Greenwich Mean
Time (= Universal Standard Time) rather than local time. If not checked,
all dates and times will be displayed in your own timezone. <SPAN  CLASS="textit">Note
that the time and date displayed is not the local time in the sender's
timezone but the time it was in your local timezone when the message
was sent.</SPAN>

<P>

<H3><A NAME="SECTION00285200000000000000">
Message Sorting Dialog</A>
</H3>

<P>
Here you can choose the criteria for sorting mailfolder listings.
If you want to use message score as a sort criterium, you need to
have a plugin module loaded which provides the ``Scoring'' interface.
At time of writing no such plugin is available, it will appear soon,
though.

<P>

<H4><A NAME="SECTION00285210000000000000">
Use Threading</A>
</H4>

<P>
If you tick this box, all messages will be threaded, i.e. sorted in
hierarchical orders, with replies following earlier messages in the
same discussion thread.

<P>

<H4><A NAME="SECTION00285220000000000000">
Re-Sort on status change</A>
</H4>

<P>
The effect of this option feels a bit strange at first and you might
not like it. If selected, the messages will be re-sorted each time
the status of a message changes. If you sort messages by message status
and delete a message, it will immediately drop to the bottom of the
list. Useful to always maintain a strict sorting order, but can be
confusing.

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00286000000000000000">
Mahogany Plugin Modules</A>
</H2>

<P>
<A NAME="Modules"></A>Mahogany can load plugin modules at runtime to extend
its functionality. Currently we are working on plugins to supply PGP/GPG
encryption support and a scoring engine for sorting mailfolder listings.
A plugin to use IBM's ViaVoice will be started work on as soon as
the Debian/Linux ``Potato'' release becomes stable.

<P>
Generally, if you want to write an extension for Mahogany without
using Python (which we hope to turn into a plugin, too, soon), you
can do that very easily by writing it as a plugin module. Get in touch
with the developers and we will show you how to do so.

<P>

<H3><A NAME="SECTION00286100000000000000">
The Plugin Module Configuration Dialog</A>
</H3>

<P>
This dialog allows you to decide which plugins get loaded at program
start. At present, modules don't get loaded/unloaded at runtime, so
you need to restart Mahogany for these options to take effect. On
the top left you see a list of all modules that Mahogany has found
in either the global <TT>modules</TT> directory or in your local directory
(<TT>$HOME/.M/modules/</TT>). The window below shows some information
about the module currently selected in the list, such as the name,
author, a description of what it does and the name of the interface
it provides. The interface would e.g. be ``Scoring'' for the
plugin providing the functionality for scoring messages and is used
by the program to find the right plugin for a given operation.

<P>
<SPAN  CLASS="textbf">Any changes to the plugin module settings will only take effect
after you re-started Mahogany!</SPAN>

<P>

<H1><A NAME="SECTION00290000000000000000"></A><A NAME="AddressDatabase"></A>
<BR>
The Address Database
</H1>

<P>
Mahogany has a built-in address book system with flexible support
for different addressbook formats. It can be easily expanded to handle
other programs' file formats and at present supports three formats -
it's own ADB format (<A HREF="#ADB"><IMG  ALIGN="BOTTOM" BORDER="1" ALT="[*]" SRC="crossref.png"></A>), (X)Emacs' BBDB (<A HREF="#BBDB"><IMG  ALIGN="BOTTOM" BORDER="1" ALT="[*]" SRC="crossref.png"></A>) address
book format, and simple one address per line file (<A HREF="#LineADB"><IMG  ALIGN="BOTTOM" BORDER="1" ALT="[*]" SRC="crossref.png"></A>).
Generally the address books are ordered hierarchically,
with the possibility to order entries in groups and sub-groups in
a tree-like fashion. Alias expansion is configurable and also handles
group names, to expand to the full list of email addresses within
that given group.

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00291000000000000000">
The native Address Book </A>
</H2>

<P>
<A NAME="ADB"></A>This is Mahogany's own address book format, offering you
the maximum set of functionality supported by the address book editor.
It offers hierarchical grouping of address entries and it also the
default address book format used by the address auto-collection mechanisms,
which uses different groups for address entries collected from different
mail folders.

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00292000000000000000">
The Address Book Editor</A>
</H2>

<P>
To edit the address book, open the address book editor. If the book
is already present in the address book tree on the left side of the
window, you may expand it (and any subgroups it might have) and start
editing immediately. If not, you must first add it to the tree by
choosing ``New..'' from the ``Book'' submenu or using
the corresponding toolbar button.

<P>
Generally speaking, there are several ways to perform the same action
in the address book editor:

<P>

<OL>
<LI>use the menus: the commands for creating and deleting address book
entries are in the ``Edit'' menu, the corresponding commands
for the address books - in ``Book'' one.
</LI>
<LI>use the toolbar: this may be more convenient because, depending on
the current position of the selected item in the tree it will propose
to create either an address book or an entry.
</LI>
<LI>use keyboard: &lt;INSERT&gt; key creates a new entry or address book if
the current selection is the root of the tree, &lt;DELETE&gt; deletes an
item and &lt;Alt-ENTER&gt; brings up the ``Properties'' dialog.
</LI>
</OL>
To edit the entry, simply select it in the tree. The data associated
to it is spread over several notebook pages - select the one which
contains the field you want to change and change it. If you want to
undo your changes, simply press ``Cancel'' at any moment - however,
this only works while you're editing the entry. As soon as you pass
to another one, all previous changes are saved and cannot be undone
any more. The changes are saved automatically when you select another
entry or close the address book editor - there is no special ``Save''
button.

<P>
To quickly move in the address book tree you may use either the ``Find''
or ``Go to'' dialogs (both available in the ``Find'' menu).
The first dialog allows you to find the entry by its contents while
the second one allows you to quickly go to the entry (in thecurrent
address book only) if you know its nickname. In the ``Find''
dialog you have several options to configure the search: it may be
either case sensitive or not (should ``mike'' match ``Mike''?)
and try to find only the whole string or just the substring of it
(should ``mik'' match ``Mike''?). You may also choose
among which fields should the search be done. You may choose as many
fields as you like (possibly all of them) but you must choose at least
one.

<P>
After you used the ``Find'' dialog once, you may choose the
``Find next'' menu item to go to the next address book entry
matching your search criterium (notice that a message in the status
bar will notify you about how many matches, if any, were found). Keep
hitting ``Find next'' until the search wraps to the beginning
(again, watch the status line for the message) or until you find the
entry you're looking for.

<P>
You may import your existing address book file by choosing the ``Import
book...''entry from the ``Book'' menu - this will open the
address book import dialog proposing you to select the

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00293000000000000000">
Support for BBDB Address Books</A>
</H2>

<P>
<A NAME="BBDB"></A>Mahogany supports reading and writing of BBDB address
book files. BBDB is the Big Brother DataBase used with the Emacs family
of editors. If you have an existing address book file, usually called
<TT>.bbdb</TT>, you can load it into Mahogany and use it. This is
especially useful if you have an existing file with auto-collected
email addresses that you want to continue to use.

<P>

<H4><A NAME="SECTION00293010000000000000">
Caution:</A>
</H4>

<P>
The BBDB address book format supports different fields than Mahogany's
native database. When reading a BBDB file, Mahogany will only read
the first two addresses and telephone numbers and assign them to the
``Home'' and ``Work'' addresses and phone numbers. All
additional addresses and phone numbers, the AKA list and the comments
will get lost. Mahogany will only save the information displayed in
the address editor window. Currently saving of phone numbers to BBDB
files is unsupported as it uses a different format from Mahogany.
<SPAN  CLASS="textit">Therefore, reading a BBDB file and saving it back to disk
may lead to a loss of information!</SPAN>

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00294000000000000000">
One Address per Line File Address Books</A>
</H2>

<P>
<A NAME="LineADB"></A>This is probably the simplest possible address book format.
It is useful for integration with external programs and scripts. Addresses
are stored without name and angle brackets. Mahogany doesn't attempt to lock
the file, so care must be taken when writing to it from both Mahogany and
external program.

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00295000000000000000">
Support for Palm Address Books</A>
</H2>

<P>
<A NAME="PalmADB"></A><SPAN  CLASS="textit">Mahogany</SPAN> does currently support reading of
Palm Addressbooks (referring to a ``Palm'' we mean the handheld
organizer Palm Pilot running PalmOS). For being able to do that it
is required to include the PalmOS-Module (see below). The support
of Palm Addressbooks is not yet fully implemented, as so far it is
only possible to download the addresses from the Palm and to display
them. Changing and uploading changed/new addresses to the Palm is
something we plan to add in the next release.

<P>
To display the Palm addressbook, create a new addressbook of type
``PalmOS''. You will be asked to put your Palm into the cradle
and to push the HotSync-button. After the download the addressbook
is accessible in read-only mode. Restarting <SPAN  CLASS="textit">Mahogany</SPAN> requires
to download the addressbook again.

<P>

<H1><A NAME="SECTION00300000000000000000"></A><A NAME="Scripting"></A>
<BR>
Scripting and Extending Mahogany
</H1>

<P>

<H1><A NAME="SECTION00310000000000000000"></A><A NAME="python"></A>
<BR>
Python Scripting
</H1>

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00311000000000000000">
Introduction</A>
</H2>

<P>
<SPAN  CLASS="textsl">Mahogany</SPAN> has an embedded Python interpreter, if compiled
with Python support enabled (check if Python appears in the ``Extra features''
list in the <TT>"Help|About..."</TT> screen if you are unsure about this).
Python is an object-oriented script language which can be used to write scripts
to be executed by <SPAN  CLASS="textsl">Mahogany</SPAN> or even to extend <SPAN  CLASS="textsl">Mahogany</SPAN>'s
functionality. Python scripts have full access to all internal Mahogany data
structures and objects.

<P>
A number of user definable callback functions are available. Scripts
have access to most objects living in Mahogany. Scripting can be disabled
in the Preferences dialog (see <A HREF="#PythonOptions"><IMG  ALIGN="BOTTOM" BORDER="1" ALT="[*]" SRC="crossref.png"></A>).

<P>
Currently the scripting support is quite basic. If you are interested
in writing scripts and need additional callbacks or support for them
within <SPAN  CLASS="textsl">Mahogany</SPAN>, please get in touch with the developers
who will be happy to add it.

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00312000000000000000">
Initialisation </A>
</H2>

<P>
At startup, <SPAN  CLASS="textsl">Mahogany</SPAN> will load a file called <TT>Minit.py</TT>
and call the <TT>Init()</TT> function defined in there, without any
arguments.

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00313000000000000000">
Using Python with Filters</A>
</H2>

<P>
It is possible to write filter tests and actions in Python. The test function
should return an integer which determines whether the test passed (non zero) or
not (zero). Both test and action functions receive as their single parameter
the <TT>Message</TT> object which corresponds to the message currently being
filtered.

<P>
Please have a look at <TT>spam.py</TT> example included in Mahogany
distribution (in <TT>Python</TT> directory under Windows and in
<TT>/usr/share/mahogany/scripts</TT> under Unix) to see a real life example of
using Python for writing non trivial filters.

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00314000000000000000"></A><A NAME="pythonhooks"></A>
<BR>
Callback Functions (Hooks)
</H2>

<P>
There are a number of callbacks available which will be called from
different places within <SPAN  CLASS="textsl">Mahogany</SPAN>. These are defined in the
header file <TT>Mcallbacks.h</TT>. There is no documentation for these
callbacks yet, but don't hesitate to ask us if you need more information
about this. All of these callbacks are called with at least one arguments
which is a pointer to the object from which it was called. E.g. for
<TT>FolderOpenHook</TT>, this would be a <TT>MailFolder</TT> object.

<P>
The callback return value is usually a boolean and indicates whether Mahogany
should proceed normally (<SPAN CLASS="MATH"><IMG
 WIDTH="14" HEIGHT="20" ALIGN="BOTTOM" BORDER="0"
 SRC="img3.png"
 ALT="$1$"></SPAN>) or cancel the operation (<SPAN CLASS="MATH"><IMG
 WIDTH="14" HEIGHT="20" ALIGN="BOTTOM" BORDER="0"
 SRC="img4.png"
 ALT="$0$"></SPAN>).

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00315000000000000000">
Namespaces</A>
</H2>

<P>
To avoid repeatedly typing in the name of the module (<TT>MailFolder</TT>
in this case), it can be imported into the global namespace with ``<TT>from&nbsp;MailFolder&nbsp;import&nbsp;*</TT>''.
By default modules are not imported into the global namespace and
must be explicitly named.

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00316000000000000000">
List of Callbacks</A>
</H2>

<P>
<BR>
<BR>
<DIV ALIGN="CENTER">

</DIV><TABLE CELLPADDING=3 BORDER="1">
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">0 8 1 0 0 0 00 8 1 0 0 0 0Callback Name</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">Object Type</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">Additional Arguments/Types</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">Return Value</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">Documentation</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">FolderOpenHook</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">MailFolder</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">&nbsp;</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">void</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">Called after a folder has been opened.</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">FolderUpdateHook</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">MailFolder</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">&nbsp;</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">void</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">Called after a folder has been updated.</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">FolderSetMessageFlag</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">MailFolder</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">(long) index of message</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">1 if changing flags is ok,0 otherwise</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">Called before changing flags for a message.</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">&nbsp;</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">&nbsp;</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">(string)name of flag</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">&nbsp;</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">&nbsp;</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">FolderClearMessageFlag</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">MailFolder</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">(long) index of message</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">1 if changing flags is ok,0 otherwise</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">Called before changing flags for a message.</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">&nbsp;</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">&nbsp;</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">(string) name of flag</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">&nbsp;</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">&nbsp;</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">FolderExpungeHook</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">MailFolder</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">&nbsp;</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">1 to expunge, 0 to abort</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">Called before expunging messages.</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">FolderNewMailHook</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">MailFolder</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">&nbsp;</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">1 to suppress default message, 0 else</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">Called when new mail arrived in folder.</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">GlobalNewMailHook</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">mApplication</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">(string) sender of mail</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">1 to suppress default message, 0 else</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">Called when new mail arrived anywhere.</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="CENTER">&nbsp;</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">&nbsp;</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">(string) subject of mail</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">&nbsp;</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">&nbsp;</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE>
<P>

<BR>
<BR>

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00317000000000000000">
Supported Classes</A>
</H2>

<P>
Python has access to Mahogany's internal class hierarchy. At present
we supply interface definitions and Python modules for only a small
number of classes, however if there is need for more classes being
supported, we can easily extend the list - please ask us if you want
more support!

<P>
Some automatically generated documentation of the Python interface
to Mahogany classes can be found in the <A NAME="tex2html8"
  HREF="../Python/">doc/Python directory</A>.
Documentation about all classes, including those not available to
Python, can be found in the <A NAME="tex2html9"
  HREF="../classes/">doc/classes directory</A>.

<P>

<H1><A NAME="SECTION00320000000000000000">
Plugins</A>
</H1>

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00321000000000000000">
Introduction</A>
</H2>

<P>
Starting with release 0.5, <SPAN  CLASS="textit">Mahogany</SPAN> allows the use of plugins
(modules). This allows for an easy and comfortable way to enlarge
<SPAN  CLASS="textit">Mahogany</SPAN>'s functionality. These modules can be loaded at runtime
and do not need to be part of the main executable.

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00322000000000000000">
The Filters Module</A>
</H2>

<P>
This module provides a filtering language for Mahogany. It allows
you to have Mahogany look at different message properties, such as
message contents, size or header lines and execute arbitrary action
on them. The most common use would be to sort mails from different
mailing lists in corresponding mailfolders, to reduce the number of
messages in your main incoming mailbox. Filters can be specified in
three possible ways:

<P>

<UL>
<LI>You can use the filters dialog. This is the most convenient and best
supported option.
</LI>
<LI>You can write them by hand, using a simple programming language remotely
similar to 'C', and put the filtering rules directly into the Mahogany
configuration file or registry.
</LI>
<LI>You can write complex rules yourself, save them to a file and tell
Mahogany to read the rules from that file.
</LI>
</UL>
The normal way to set up filters is to specify them in the filters
dialog (<A HREF="#FiltersDialog"><IMG  ALIGN="BOTTOM" BORDER="1" ALT="[*]" SRC="crossref.png"></A>) and then tell Mahogany folder which
of the filter rules to use for the individual folders with athe folder
filters dialog (<A HREF="#FolderFiltersDialog"><IMG  ALIGN="BOTTOM" BORDER="1" ALT="[*]" SRC="crossref.png"></A>).

<P>

<H3><A NAME="SECTION00322100000000000000"></A><A NAME="FiltersDialog"></A>
<BR>
The Filters Dialog
</H3>

<P>
This dialog allows you to define any number of filter rules available
to Mahogany. In a seaparate dialog (<A HREF="#FolderFiltersDialog"><IMG  ALIGN="BOTTOM" BORDER="1" ALT="[*]" SRC="crossref.png"></A>) you
can then pick any rule from the list and assign it to a folder. As
you can have different sets of rules for each folder and might want
to share rules for some folders, this dialog simply sets up rules
and you can later specify for which folders to use them. When editing
or adding a new filter rule, you will get to the following dialog:

<P>

<H3><A NAME="SECTION00322200000000000000">
The Filter-Rule Dialog</A>
</H3>

<P>
This dialog allows you to set up or edit an individual filtering rule,
it contains of the following components:

<P>

<UL>
<LI>The rule name, in the text entry field at the very top. This name
is only to help you remember what the rule does and will appear in
the list of rules in the main Filters Dialog, but is without any further
significance.
</LI>
<LI>Underneath the name, you find the text ``If Message...'' followed
by at least one row of conditioncontrols.
</LI>
<LI>Under the condition controls you find the text ``Then do this:``
followed by some action controls.
</LI>
</UL>
You can add more pattern matching controls by pressing the [More]
button, and you can delete the last pattern matching rule by pressing
the [Less] button. The number of actions to execute is fixed to
one.

<P>
You can use several condition and connect them via logical AND and
OR, optionally negating them by ticking the [Not] box. The following
conditions can be tested for at present:

<P>

<UL>
<LI>Always - this rule will always be executed
</LI>
<LI>Contains - check if the text next to it is contained in the message
component selected
</LI>
<LI>Match - check if the message component selected is exactly this text
(case independent)
</LI>
<LI>Match Case - check if the message compent selected is exactly this
text (case dependent)
</LI>
<LI>Match RegExp - check if the message compent selected matches the regular
expression specified
</LI>
<LI>Larger Than - check if the message is larger than this in KByte
</LI>
<LI>Smaller Than - check if the message is smaller than this in KByte
</LI>
<LI>Older Than - check if the message is older than this many days
</LI>
<LI>Newer Than - check if the message is newer than this many days
</LI>
<LI>Is SPAM - check if the message originates from a system blacklisted
as sending unsolicited emails (SPAM).
</LI>
<LI>Python - execute the text in the box in the built-in Python interpreter
and proceed if it returns a non-0 result.
</LI>
</UL>
The possible actions which can be performed, are:

<P>

<UL>
<LI>Delete - deletes the message
</LI>
<LI>Copy to - copies the message to the folder specified
</LI>
<LI>Move to - moves the message to the folder specified
</LI>
<LI>Expunge - expunge all messages in this folder
</LI>
<LI>MessageBox - open a message box dialog with the text specified
</LI>
<LI>LogEntry - add the text specified to the log window
</LI>
<LI>Python - execute the text specified in the built-in Python interpreter
</LI>
</UL>
If you are not using a Trash folder, it is a good idea to add a rule
at the end of the list of filtering rules, that always expunges all
messages. For testing filters, you can leave that rule disabled, an
all messages will get treated and marked as deleted, but stay around.
Only when expunge is executed, will they really disappear in the original
mailbox. Notice, if you are using a Trash folder, this does not apply,
as messages won't be marked as deleted but moved straight to Trash.

<P>

<H3><A NAME="SECTION00322300000000000000"></A><A NAME="FolderFiltersDialog"></A>
<BR>
The Folder Filters dialog
</H3>

<P>
This dialog allows you to assign filter rules to a folder. You can
pick them from the set of existing filter rules (set up via the Filters
Dialog (<A HREF="#FiltersDialog"><IMG  ALIGN="BOTTOM" BORDER="1" ALT="[*]" SRC="crossref.png"></A>)) and change the order of the rules.
The listbox on the left lists the existing filtering rules for the
currently selected folder in the order in which they are executed.
You can use the buttons to change the order or rules. You can also
activate/deactivate rules by clicking on the litte checkbox ([X]
or [ ]) next to their name.

<P>
If you want to apply rules to all incoming messages and are collecting
mail from different servers, simply apply the rules to the ``New
Mail'' folder if you have one, alternatively you can set up rules
for individual servers or INBOX.

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00323000000000000000">
The PalmOS Module</A>
</H2>

<P>
When 3Com released its first PalmPilots several years ago, many people
did not believe in a success. But they were proven wrong, the Palm
Pilot (or short: Palm) is today the most used handheld organizer.

<P>
For all the people possessing one of those little helpers, the PalmOS
Module allows (or will allow) for an easy integration of the Palm's
data in Mahogany. In future releases there will be full support for
addressbook synching, schedules etc. Currently you can only view the
Palm's addressbook (see above) and use <SPAN  CLASS="textit">Mahogany</SPAN> as your Palm
desktop software.

<P>

<H3><A NAME="SECTION00323100000000000000">
Desktop functionality</A>
</H3>

<P>
As there is not really a common Palm desktop in the Unix/Linux environment
(not like under MS Windows), we thought it a nice idea to include
the desktop into <SPAN  CLASS="textit">Mahogany</SPAN>. Therefore <SPAN  CLASS="textit">Mahogany</SPAN> does allow
to

<P>

<UL>
<LI>create backups of the Palm's databases using the ``Backup''
function
</LI>
<LI>restore the previously backup-ed databases using the ``Restore''
function
</LI>
<LI>install new files to the Palm using the ``Install'' function
</LI>
</UL>
To use this functionality, you must of course have the PalmOS module
enabled. You can access the functions via the Plugin menu. In addition
to the above mentioned tasks, you can specify quite a lot of options
to adapt for instance the backup process to your personal needs.

<P>
There is an additional function not mentioned yet, labelled ``Synchronize''.
Via the configuration dialog you can specify what should happen during
synchronization - starting with mail exchange, backups and automatic
installations. Read the following section about the configuration
dialog to get see how you can customize your PalmOS-Module.

<P>

<H3><A NAME="SECTION00323200000000000000">
The configuration dialog</A>
</H3>

<P>
You can configure the PalmOS module via the Plugin menu in a lot of
ways. Let's go through every single item in the configuration dialog
which you can access using the Plugin-Menu:

<P>
<DL>
<DT><STRONG>Synchronise&nbsp;Mail</STRONG></DT>
<DD>When you have this enabled, you can specify a mailbox
which will be used as place of exchange for mails. Mails in this folder
will be transfered to the Palm at the next hotsync and the outbox
of the Palm's mail program will be send. This mailbox is also used
as a configuration setting for messages sent. <SPAN  CLASS="textit">Mahogany</SPAN> will
use the properties of this mailbox when sending the messages retrieved
from the Palm's Outbox. If you have enabled the ``advanced user''
option in the program preferences' identity tab, you can set up a
separate return-address or completely different options for this mailbox
and therefore have the mail sent from the PalmPilot with different
settings as those sent normally. The options for user name and return
address as set on the Palm are ignored when mails are sent with <SPAN  CLASS="textit">Mahogany</SPAN>.
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>Mailbox&nbsp;for&nbsp;Exchange</STRONG></DT>
<DD>Enter here the name of the mailbox that should
be used for mail exchange when you have the ``Synchronise Mail''
feature enabled (see above).
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>Mail&nbsp;disposal&nbsp;mode</STRONG></DT>
<DD>This specifies what to do with outgoing e-mails
retrieved from the PalmPilot and sent. You have three options:

<P>

<UL>
<LI>file : move messages from Outbox to Filed mailbox on the Palm
</LI>
<LI>delete : delete messages after sending
</LI>
<LI>keep : keep messages in Palm's Outbox
</LI>
</UL>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>Always&nbsp;do&nbsp;Backup</STRONG></DT>
<DD>Setting this checkbox to true will make a backup
take place every time you ``Synchronize''.
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>Directory&nbsp;for&nbsp;backup&nbsp;files</STRONG></DT>
<DD>This field does contain a valid directory
path where the PalmOS-Module will store the backup of your Palm's
databases.
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>Delete&nbsp;no&nbsp;longer&nbsp;existing&nbsp;backups</STRONG></DT>
<DD>This checkbox determines whether
you want files to be deleted on the PC that are residing in the backup
directory but are not any longer on the Palm. This makes it possible
to really keep the backup identical to the Palm, but has the disadvantage
that you might loose data if you (accidently?) delete important data
on the Palm and do a backup, as the backup-ed databases will be deleted
too. So think carefully whether you do really want to do this.
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>Make&nbsp;incremental&nbsp;backup&nbsp;only</STRONG></DT>
<DD>Enable this checkbox if you only
want to make an incremental backup. Using this features will speed
the backup process up, as only changed or new databases are downloaded
from the Palm.
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>Backup&nbsp;all&nbsp;databases</STRONG></DT>
<DD>Enabling this checkbox will make the PalmOS-Module
ignore the backup flags of the databases. By default the PalmOS-Module
does only backup files with a set backup flag. Use this option if
you want all files to be backup'ed.
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>Exclude&nbsp;these&nbsp;databases</STRONG></DT>
<DD>Here you can specify a comma separated
list of databases (without spaces!) that should not be backup'ed.
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>Do&nbsp;auto-install</STRONG></DT>
<DD>Using this feature enables the auto-install feature
and everytime you ``Synchronize'' the module will check the
auto-install directory for Palm databases. If databases are found
they will be installed and deleted without further notice!
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>Auto-install&nbsp;directory</STRONG></DT>
<DD>Specify here a directory where the files
to be auto-installed can be found.
</DD>
</DL>
Besides that, some general options are available:

<P>
<DL>
<DT><STRONG>Pilot&nbsp;device</STRONG></DT>
<DD>Here you can specify the device where the Pilot is
residing (this ought to be /dev/pilot under Unix/Linux and Com1: or
Com2: under MS Windows (not yet supported)).
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>Connection&nbsp;speed</STRONG></DT>
<DD>You have the choice beetween different hotsync
speeds (``connection speed''), measured in baud.
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>Try&nbsp;to&nbsp;lock&nbsp;device</STRONG></DT>
<DD>You can force a lock of the above set device
by enabling ``Try to lock device''
</DD>
</DL>

<P>

<H3><A NAME="SECTION00323300000000000000">
Accessing the Palms</A>
</H3>

<P>
There is the ``general'' approach to get the Palm databases
on your computer and the more selective one. For the first one, just
use the ``Synchronize'' menu point in the plugin menu. Depending
on what you have enabled in the configuration dialog (see above),
different actions will be taken (backup, mail exchange, ...).

<P>
If you only want to update your backup or to install a file or to
restore your Palm's contents, you can access these functions individually
by using the corresponding menu points in the plugin menu.

<P>

<H1><A NAME="SECTION00400000000000000000">
Getting Help and Support</A>
</H1>

<P>

<H1><A NAME="SECTION00410000000000000000"></A><A NAME="Troubleshooting"></A>
<BR>
Troubleshooting
</H1>

<P>
Before asking for the help on our mailing lists, please try to see
if you cannot fix, or, at least, understand the reasons of, the problem
yourself. It is difficult to list everything which could go wrong
here but here are some basic recommendations:

<P>

<UL>
<LI>(Unix) If the program doesn't compile, please make sure you use GNU
make. If it still doesn't help, please let us know about it but don't
forget to include the compilation errors log (if there are too many
errors, there is no need to include all of them, just the few first
ones). If the problem has happened at configure time, please look
at config.log file configure created and include it in your report.
</LI>
<LI>(Unix) If the program crashes mysteriously please make sure you don't
have incompatible and/or different versions of the program sources,
headers and modules. Also, please check that you have only one version
of wxWidgets installed. Also, make sure to rebuild everything (ideally,
create a new build directory) after installing or uninstalling a new
wxWidgets or Mahogany version. If the problem still persists, please
try building the debug version of the program (you need debug wxWidgets
library and run configure with <TT>-enable-debug switch</TT>), run it under
<SMALL>GDB</SMALL> and send us the output of ``bt'' command in the
debugger when it crashes.
</LI>
<LI>If your problem is related to receiving or sending mail, please look
at the message log window for possible explanation. If you don't see
the log window, make sure it wasn't disabled in the ``Miscellaneous''
(last) page of the preferences dialog - and reenable it if it was.
If there is nothing helpful in the log window, please turn on ``Debug
server and mailbox access'' option in the same page. It may also
be useful to enable logging to a file if the program crashes as the
file contents, unlike the log window, is not lost in this case.
</LI>
</UL>

<P>

<H1><A NAME="SECTION00420000000000000000">
WWW Support</A>
</H1>

<P>
Mahogany has a home on the world wide web where you can get up to
date information about development and the last releases. Come and
visit us at the <A NAME="tex2html10"
  HREF="http://mahogany.sourceforge.net/">Mahogany Homepage</A>
<P>

<H1><A NAME="SECTION00430000000000000000">
Mailing Lists</A>
</H1>

<P>
Several mailing lists exist to contact the developers, to receive
updates of new releases and to exchange information and experiences
with other users. Please visit the <A NAME="tex2html11"
  HREF="http://sourceforge.net/projects/mahogany">Mahogany Project Page</A>for
more information and to join the lists.

<P>
If you want to help further development of Mahogany, please go to
the same place and you will find all the information you need about
how to contribute or how to contact us.

<P>

<H1><A NAME="SECTION00500000000000000000">
Advanced Usage</A>
</H1>

<P>

<H1><A NAME="SECTION00510000000000000000">
Compiling <SPAN  CLASS="textsl">Mahogany</SPAN> from source</A>
</H1>

<P>
Run ./configure; make; make doc; make install.

<P>
Some quick notes about common compilation problems can be found in
the FAQ, in section <A HREF="#CompileErrors"><IMG  ALIGN="BOTTOM" BORDER="1" ALT="[*]" SRC="crossref.png"></A>.

<P>

<H1><A NAME="SECTION00520000000000000000">
Using <SPAN  CLASS="textsl">Mahogany</SPAN> more efficiently</A>
</H1>

<P>
This section contains assorted tips about how you can make <SPAN  CLASS="textsl">Mahogany</SPAN>
run faster.

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00521000000000000000">
Speeding up <SPAN  CLASS="textsl">Mahogany</SPAN> startup</A>
</H2>

<P>
Unix users only: <SPAN  CLASS="textsl">Mahogany</SPAN> accesses the file <SMALL>~</SMALL>/.M/<SMALL>CONFIG</SMALL>
which stores all program options on startup. If this file is located
on a slow partition such as a network disk (NFS), the startup time
can be reduced just by moving it elsewhere and creating a link to
it from <SMALL>~</SMALL>/.M directory.

<P>
You can choose to not open any folders at startup (``Folders''
page of the options dialog) if doing this takes too long in your case.
Also, remember to close the address book editor window if you don't
want it to be reopened the next time you run <SPAN  CLASS="textsl">Mahogany.</SPAN>

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00522000000000000000"></A><A NAME="limitdatatransfer"></A>
<BR>
Limiting Amount of Data Transferred
</H2>

<P>
When using a remote server, especially over a slow link (such as a
modem), it may be undesirable to automatically retrieve all messages
from the server. Mahogany provides several options to help you with
limiting the amount of data transferred.

<P>
First, you should probably disable the ``Open folder at single
click'' and ``Preview message when selected'' options from
the ``Message View'' and ``Miscellaneous'' pages of the
options dialog to avoid accidentally open a folder or a message.

<P>
Second, there are several useful settings in the ``Folders''
page. Note that they can be set for each folder separately so you
can only choose to change the default values for some slow servers
but keep the original values for all the other ones. These options
allow you to specify a threshold for message size: before downloading
a message of size bigger than the specified (in Kb), you will be asked
for the confirmation.

<P>

<H1><A NAME="SECTION00600000000000000000">
FAQ - Frequently Asked Questions</A>
</H1>

<P>
Being a brand new program, this section is currently pretty empty.
However, we will constantly update this chapter with questions received
on the mailing lists.

<P>

<H1><A NAME="SECTION00610000000000000000">
Installation Problems</A>
</H1>

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00611000000000000000">
All Mahogany icons show a question mark</A>
</H2>

<P>
<SPAN  CLASS="textit">I'm a linux user (redhat) who just found Mahogany and really
likes it, but I have a problem, I can't get all the widgets to work,
the pictures on the buttons and the ones before the mailboxes all
appear as an questionmark?</SPAN>

<P>
It depends how you installed it. If the icon with the question mark
appears, it means that Mahogany didn't find its installation directory
with the icons. If you installed the linux version from the .tar.gz
with the binary, it should go into /usr/local or a similar place and
you should have the icons in /usr/local/share/M/icons. If they are
not there, Mahogany cannot find them. If you have installed it in
a different location, Mahogany should ask you for the installation
(&#34;global Mahogany directory&#34;) when you start it
for the first time.

<P>
If you have compiled it yourself, make sure you do a &#34;make
install&#34; or &#34;make install_all&#34; (of which
parts might fail, depending on your setup), to install everything
in the right place. If you just grabbed the binary of the daily snapshot,
you need to have a working Mahogany installation as well or it won't
get the icons. You do not need any additional library, Mahogany handles
xpm files internally.

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00612000000000000000">
How do I unpack the compressed files?</A>
</H2>

<P>
The distribution files for Solaris and some of the other ones are
in compressed tar format, having the ending <TT>.tar.gz</TT> . To
unpack them you need <TT>gzip</TT> and <TT>tar</TT>. Change to the
directory where you want to install Mahogany, e.g to <TT>/usr</TT>
or <TT>/opt</TT> or <TT>/usr/local</TT> and issue the following command:

<P>
<BLOCKQUOTE>
<TT>gzip -dc &lt; thedistributionfile | tar xvof -</TT>

</BLOCKQUOTE>
Where <TT>thedistributionfile</TT> is the complete path to the file
you downloaded. You will need to have proper write access to the directory
where you install it and <TT>tar</TT> should show you a list of all
files being installed as it unpacks them.

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00613000000000000000">
Compiling aborts with errors</A>
</H2>

<P>
<A NAME="CompileErrors"></A>A common problem with compiling wxGTK and Mahogany
is, that you need to follow the instructions in Mahogany's README
file and use the configure script to set them up as explained. If
you use different arguments for configure than those shown in README,
things will not work! Also, before running configure again, remove
any *.cache and *status files in the working directory or configure
will re-use some old settings.

<P>
Also, as we are omitting some unused subdirectories from the wxGTK
source, to save you download time, you may need to run ``make -k''
rather than just ``make'' to get it to ignore some errors caused
by this. On non-Linux/GNU systems, you need to use the GNU make utility,
i.e. ``gmake'' rather than the default ``make''.

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00614000000000000000">
Mahogany fails to find wxWidgets, configure fails</A>
</H2>

<P>
The following steps should identify and solve the problem:

<P>

<OL>
<LI>Do a &#34;make install&#34; for wxWidgets and watch the
output, it should copy lots of things to /usr/local/....
</LI>
<LI>Do a &#34;which wx-config&#34;, it should report wx-config
to be in /usr/local/bin
</LI>
<LI>Just type &#34;wx-config -cxxflags&#34;, it should run
the wx-config script and report the compiler flags, which should include
something like &#34;-I/usr/local/include&#34;.
</LI>
<LI>Then go to the Mahogany directory and &#34;rm *cache*&#34;
to remove old configuration info and run ./configure
</LI>
<LI>This *should* find wx/wx.h if all of the above worked, if not,
look at the end of config.log to see what went wrong.
</LI>
<LI>If it does not find the wxWidgets library, you need to add /usr/local/lib
to either your LD_LIBRARY_PATH or to /etc/ld.so.conf (and run /sbin/ldconfig
as root), then remove *cache* and try again. Again, if something
fails, look at config.log.
</LI>
</OL>

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00615000000000000000">
SSL does not work</A>
</H2>

<P>
<SPAN  CLASS="textit">I went to the &#34;Miscellaneous&#34; tab in preferences
menu and made sure the pathnames of libcrypto and libssl where correct.
I enabled SSL in the access tab of my mail folder preferences. However,
when I try to open that folder, it fails and the log window talks
about being unable to load libssl.</SPAN>

<P>
Under Linux, this is due to a combination of factors, fixing one of
them is enough to fix the problem. Versions of libssl.so older than
0.9.6 require libcrypto to be explicitly loaded beforehand. Updating
to version 0.9.6 or newer fixes the problem. Versions of libwx_gtk
older than or equal to 2.2.0 load shared libraries in such a way that,
even though M loads libcrypto, libssl still fails to load. Upgrading
libwx_gtk to a later version will fix the problem. Finally, if everything
else fails, starting M with the command: ``LD_PRELOAD=/usr/lib/libcrypto.so
M'' will fix the problem as well. If the second solution is used,
the pathname of libcrypto.so must be set properly. Otherwise it is
better to leave it blank.

<P>

<H1><A NAME="SECTION00620000000000000000">
Other Problems / Questions</A>
</H1>

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00621000000000000000">
The Preferences Dialog does not show up properly</A>
</H2>

<P>
<SPAN  CLASS="textit">When I set up Mahogany or select the preferences dialog, its
contents do not appear. Sometimes I cannot enter anything in the fields.</SPAN>

<P>
wxGTK has a problem with constraint handling which can cause this
dialog to sometimes get into an endless loop trying to do the layout.
On most windowmanagers it helps if you resize the dialog a little
and it will appear correctly. This seems to depend on the platform
and window manager. Also, wxGTK does not seem to work correctly with
OpenLook which does not allow you to enter anything.

<P>
Sometimes there may be some dialog window opened behind Mahogany window
or on another desktop. Please check this (with Alt-Tab) if you think
Mahogany got stuck.

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00622000000000000000">
How to use Mahogany with fetchmail/procmail?</A>
</H2>

<P>
<SPAN  CLASS="textit">I use fetchmail and procmail to deliver my mail (Redhat Linux).
I'm reading mail with Netscape right now and I want to move to M.
I cannot for the life of me get M to open my mail when it loads. I
have to open them manually. Can someone please help me to get M to
open all of my Linux Folders at startup.</SPAN>

<P>
You should be able to right-click on the folder treecontrol on the
left of the main screen and &#34;Create a new folder&#34;.
Make it of type &#34;file&#34; and specify the path to the
the folder file as the filename. Your normal mailspool /var/spool/mail/username
is available under the name INBOX anyway, but I guess you have fetchmail/procmail
deliver your mail to some other place.

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00623000000000000000">
Does Mahogany have group aliases?</A>
</H2>

<P>
Mahogany supports alias expansion for individual entries and for groups.
There are two ways in which you can expand an alias to a group of
addresses:

<P>

<UL>
<LI>The quick and dirty approach: Create an addressbook entry and simply
list multiple, comma separated, addresses in its Email field. Mahogany
will use the whole contents of this field when expanding aliases.
</LI>
<LI>The more elegant method: Create a new group in your addressbook and
add the individual addresses as sub-entries of this group. If you
use the group name as a mail alias, Mahogany will expand it to the
list of email addresses of all of its group members. This is more
powerful, as you can easily add and remove entries to sub groups.
</LI>
</UL>

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00624000000000000000">
How can I set up POP3/IMAP access?</A>
</H2>

<P>
<SPAN  CLASS="textit">It is not immediately apparent how to set up my POP3 server
under 0.23a , can someone give me a hand, please? It appears there
is no section in the initial configuration utility for this. <A NAME="POP3"></A></SPAN>

<P>
Mahogany allows you to have as many folders or mail accounts as you
like. That's why it doesn't ask you at the beginning. To add a POP
account:

<P>

<OL>
<LI>right click on the folder tree and choose &#34;Create Folder&#34;
</LI>
<LI>give the folder a name, set its type to POP3 and fill in the required
fields, such as server and login
</LI>
<LI>Click on [OK]. The folder will now appear in the tree
</LI>
<LI>Double-click on the folder to open it.
</LI>
</OL>

<UL>
<LI>If opening fails, right click on it again and choose &#34;Properties&#34;,
make sure that all settings are correct.
</LI>
<LI>- If you want Mahogany to collect all mail from that box, you can
tick that checkbox and whenever Mahogany starts, it will open that
box and continue collecting all mail from there and move it to the
&#34;New Mail&#34; folder.
</LI>
</UL>

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00625000000000000000">
How can I set up IMAP access?</A>
</H2>

<P>
Follow the rules for setting up POP3 access<A HREF="#POP3"><IMG  ALIGN="BOTTOM" BORDER="1" ALT="[*]" SRC="crossref.png"></A> but set the
folder type to be ``IMAP folder''. Then enter the name of your
IMAP server, your username and password (or leave it empty to be asked
later) for that server and, optionally, the path to the folder on
the IMAP server. You can leave the path empty, and it will use the
default folder (usually INBOX).

<P>
If you want to access many IMAP folders on the same server, or a directory
there, you can create foldertree entries representing the IMAP server
itself (i.e. the top-level directory on it) or a directory on the
IMAP server. For these, if not using the Wizard dialog, make sure
that the folder properties dialog has the ``is directory'' checkbox
ticked, which tells Mahogany that it is not a mailbox file to open,
but a directory which can be browsed for entries via the popup menu.

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00626000000000000000">
Can I have multiple POP3 or IMAP accounts?</A>
</H2>

<P>
<SPAN  CLASS="textit">Can I access multiple different POP3 or IMAP accounts?</SPAN>

<P>
Yes, <SPAN  CLASS="textit">Mahogany</SPAN> allows you to have any number of different
folders configured, and you can choose different account type ("Folder
Type" setting in "Access" page when creating a folder) for them.
Just right-click on the folder tree control and
choose the ``Create Folder...'' option from the popup-menu.
You can then switch between the different folders by selecting them
(usually with a double-click on the tree control) for display in the
main window, or, by selecting ``Open'' from the popup-menu which
will open the folders in their own individual windows.

<P>
You can also select the ``Collect all mail from this folder''
option when creating the entries for them (or later, via the ``Preferences''
popup-menu option) to let <SPAN  CLASS="textit">Mahogany</SPAN> automatically check these
accounts for new mail and collect it from there.

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00627000000000000000">
Can I have multiple identities?</A>
</H2>

<P>
<SPAN  CLASS="textit">Does Mahogany allow me to send email as different people?
That is, if I monitor two IMAP or POP servers, one for my work email,
and one for my home email, can I reply to emails and specify it to
use my home or work email address as the sender?</SPAN>

<P>
Yes, you can set almost *all* options on a per-folder basis, including
your name or return address, even outgoing SMTP servers to make it
perfect. To have full access to all these configuration options in
the folder properties dialog, you must first set your user level to
``advanced'' in the main configuration dialog, otherwise only
a small subset of configuration options is available. You can also
create global identities which are available in all folders.

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00628000000000000000">
Can I run Mahogany as root?</A>
</H2>

<P>
<SPAN  CLASS="textit">Very simple question: can I run Mahogany on a unix system
as the superuser (root)?</SPAN>

<P>
Not directly. There are two problems with it:

<P>

<OL>
<LI>It is not a good idea for security reasons. In fact, you should not
even run X11 as root. Though, we would not dare to impose that on
you, if you want to, that is your problem.
</LI>
<LI>The technical reason, and this is why Mahogany does not allow it:
The c-client library that we use for accessing mail folders and servers
uses the user-Id 0 (root) internally and does not work when called
as root. When inquiring why this is so, c-client's author told us
that it was bad to read mail as root - he thinks he knows what is
good for you. Unless we find an easy way to circumvent that problem,
you will not be able to run Mahogany as root as we have no time and
desire to re-write the c-client library just for this.
</LI>
</OL>
There is a workaround however:

<P>
You can forward your email to another user, say ``<TT>user1</TT>'',
by creating a <TT>/root/.forward</TT> file containing that user's
name. Then, run Mahogany through the ``<TT>su</TT>'' command:
``<TT>su user1 -c mahogany</TT>''. This will work just fine.
If you get an error message about it being unable to access your X11
display, do a ``<TT>xhost localhost</TT>'' before, which will
allow all local users to access your display. All this is not very
safe from a security point of view if you don't trust your local machine,
but perfectly fine for standalone or dialup boxes.

<P>
Update: Mahogany now runs as &#34;root&#34;.

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION00629000000000000000">
How can I set which language to use?</A>
</H2>

<P>
Under Unix: simply set and export your LANG environment variable like
for any other program, too. Under Windows: the environment variable
LANG will be recognised if it is set, but in addition Mahogany will
automatically detect which language your system is set to use.

<P>
In addition, there is a <TT>-lang</TT> command line option, see
<A HREF="#cmdlineargs"><IMG  ALIGN="BOTTOM" BORDER="1" ALT="[*]" SRC="crossref.png"></A>.

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION006210000000000000000">
How can I delete messages?</A>
</H2>

<P>
<SPAN  CLASS="textit">If I press 'D' or 'Del' or use the menu to delete messages,
they get marked as deleted but never disappear. How can I delete them?</SPAN>

<P>
Simple, press '#' or 'x' or select Message/Expunge from the menu.
Mahogany will also ask you if you want to expunge them when closing
the folder. If you use the Trash folder, this only applies to that
one as all other folders will move messages straight to Trash instead
of marking them deleted.

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION006211000000000000000">
How can I forward a message with attachments?</A>
</H2>

<P>
Do &#34;Forward with template&#34; and create a new template
containing $quote822 - this will forward the entire message. You
can also change the default forward template to do it.

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION006212000000000000000">
How can I customize the position of folders in the tree?</A>
</H2>

<P>
Unfortunately there is no GUI support for doing it yet. You may vote for the
<A NAME="tex2html12"
  HREF="http://mahogany.sourceforge.net/cgi-bin/show_bug.cgi?id=404">bug 404</A>
or subscribe to
it if you want to be notified when this is implemented.

<P>
But in the meanwhile you can do it manually relatively simply. Under Unix you
will need to edit the configuration file (<TT>$HOME/.M/config</TT> by default)
and under Windows you need to directly modify the registry entries (see
<A HREF="#registrykey"><IMG  ALIGN="BOTTOM" BORDER="1" ALT="[*]" SRC="crossref.png"></A>). In any case the program shouldn't run when you are
doing this modification.

<P>
Here is what you should do: just add ``Index=N'' entry in the folder
profile section of the config file. I.e. if you add the marked lines:

<P>
<PRE>
[IMAP/Inbox]
Index=0                 # added manually
...

[IMAP/Mahogany]
Index=1                 # added manually
...

[IMAP/Junk]
Index=100               # added manually
</PRE>

<P>
then Inbox and Mahogany will appear first and Junk last in the tree.

<P>
Under Windows you need to add the registry values of type DWORD using
the registry editor. For example, the value for Junk folder should be added
under <TT>HKCU<SPAN CLASS="MATH"><IMG
 WIDTH="14" HEIGHT="39" ALIGN="MIDDLE" BORDER="0"
 SRC="img2.png"
 ALT="$\backslash$"></SPAN>Software<SPAN CLASS="MATH"><IMG
 WIDTH="14" HEIGHT="39" ALIGN="MIDDLE" BORDER="0"
 SRC="img2.png"
 ALT="$\backslash$"></SPAN>Mahogany-Team<SPAN CLASS="MATH"><IMG
 WIDTH="14" HEIGHT="39" ALIGN="MIDDLE" BORDER="0"
 SRC="img2.png"
 ALT="$\backslash$"></SPAN>M<SPAN CLASS="MATH"><IMG
 WIDTH="14" HEIGHT="39" ALIGN="MIDDLE" BORDER="0"
 SRC="img2.png"
 ALT="$\backslash$"></SPAN>Profiles<SPAN CLASS="MATH"><IMG
 WIDTH="14" HEIGHT="39" ALIGN="MIDDLE" BORDER="0"
 SRC="img2.png"
 ALT="$\backslash$"></SPAN>IMAP<SPAN CLASS="MATH"><IMG
 WIDTH="14" HEIGHT="39" ALIGN="MIDDLE" BORDER="0"
 SRC="img2.png"
 ALT="$\backslash$"></SPAN>Junk</TT>
key.

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION006213000000000000000">
How can I ``leave messages on server'' (POP3)?</A>
</H2>

<P>
Typical POP3 server: normally, the new mail is downloaded from the
POP3 folders locally so go to the ``New Mail'' page in folder
properties and select ``Collect new mail from this folder''.
This will move all new mail from the POP3 server to the ``New Mail''
folder. If you want to copy it instead (leave messages on server)
just check the ``Leave mail in this folder'' checkbox as well.

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION006214000000000000000">
Can I have ``subfolders'' of File type (mbox) folders?</A>
</H2>

<P>
Mahogany tries to preserve some sanity by disabling &#34;Create
new folder&#34; in the popup menu when you select a folder of
a non hierarchical format (such as MBX) but you can still circumvent
this by doing <TT>"Folder|Create..."</TT> and selecting the
folder you want as the parent.

<P>

<H2><A NAME="SECTION006215000000000000000">
Can I ``Follow-up'' to the message?</A>
</H2>

<P>
You can open the message in the Sent Mail folder and do <TT>"Message|Edit
in composer"</TT>. It is sort of like &#34;replying to yourself&#34;
but the to/from fields remain the same.

<P>
<BR><HR><H4>Footnotes</H4>
<DL>
<DT><A NAME="foot149">... LGPL</A><A
 HREF="Manual.html#tex2html3"><SUP><SPAN CLASS="arabic">1</SPAN>.<SPAN CLASS="arabic">1</SPAN></SUP></A></DT>
<DD>which we recently felt victim of - due to some strong demand, we have
decided to allow alternatively licensing Mahogany under GPL


</DD>
<DT><A NAME="foot312">... file</A><A
 HREF="Manual.html#tex2html6"><SUP><SPAN CLASS="arabic">1</SPAN>.<SPAN CLASS="arabic">2</SPAN></SUP></A></DT>
<DD>use the option in the synchronisation
page of the options dialog to force using a file instead of the registry under
Windows

</DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR>
<ADDRESS>
Vadim Zeitlin
2006-08-06
</ADDRESS>
</BODY>
</HTML>

Lines 98-104 Link Here

(-)mahogany-0.67/doc/release.txt (-2 / +1 lines)
98		98
99	mahogany-announce@lists.sourceforge.net	99	mahogany-announce@lists.sourceforge.net
100	mahogany-users@lists.sourceforge.net	100	mahogany-users@lists.sourceforge.net
101	mahogany-developers@lists.sourceforge.net
102		101
103	c-client@u.washington.edu	102	c-client@u.washington.edu
104	wxwin-announce@lists.wxwindows.org	103	wxwin-announce@lists.wxwindows.org
Lines 118-124 Link Here
118		117
119	Update the FM record	118	Update the FM record
120		119
121	d) GNOME app map: http://www.gnome.org/softwaremap/projects/mahogany/	120	d) GNOME app map: http://www.gnomefiles.org/app.php/Mahogany
122		121
123	e) GNU Free Software Directory: http://www.gnu.org/directory/mahogany.html	122	e) GNU Free Software Directory: http://www.gnu.org/directory/mahogany.html
124		123




// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
// Modified by:
// Created:     24.12.98
// CVS-ID:      $Id: wxBrowseButton.h,v 1.27 2006/08/31 23:18:29 vadz Exp $
// Copyright:   (c) 1998 Vadim Zeitlin <zeitlin@dptmaths.ens-cachan.fr>
// Licence:     M license
///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////

   // show the font selection dialog
   virtual void DoBrowse();

   // convert between wxNativeFontInfo description and the string we show to
   // the user in the text control
   static String FontDescToUser(const String& desc);
   static String FontDescFromUser(const String& desc);

private:
   DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxFontBrowseButton)
};

Lines 1-14 Link Here

(-)mahogany-0.67/include/guidef.h (-13 / +31 lines)
1	/-- c++ --*******************************************************	1	///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
2	* guidef.h define the GUI implementation *	2	// Project: M - cross platform e-mail GUI client
3	* *	3	// File name: guidef.h
4	* (C) 1997 by Karsten Ballüder (Ballueder@usa.net) *	4	// Purpose: miscellaneous GUI helpers
5	* *	5	// Author: Karsten Ballüder, Vadim Zeitlin
6	* $Id: guidef.h,v 1.25 2004/08/13 20:57:56 vadz Exp $	6	// Created: 1998
7	*	7	// CVS-ID: $Id: guidef.h,v 1.26 2006/08/19 13:11:59 vadz Exp $
8	*******************************************************************/	8	// Copyright: (c) 1998-2006 Mahogany team
		9	// Licence: M license
		10	///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
9		11
10	#ifndef GUIDEF_H	12	#ifndef M_GUIDEF_H_
11	#define GUIDEF_H	13	#define M_GUIDEF_H_
12		14
13	#ifndef USE_PCH	15	#ifndef USE_PCH
14	# include <wx/frame.h>	16	# include <wx/frame.h>
Lines 63-70 Link Here
63	find a replacement encoding - if this succeeds, the text is translated into	65	find a replacement encoding - if this succeeds, the text is translated into
64	this encoding and the encoding parameter is modified in place.	66	this encoding and the encoding parameter is modified in place.
65		67
66	Note that this function is implemented in wxMApp.cpp.
67
68	@param encoding the encoding to check, may be modified	68	@param encoding the encoding to check, may be modified
69	@param text the text we want to show in this encoding, may be translated	69	@param text the text we want to show in this encoding, may be translated
70	@return true if this or equivalent encoding is available, false otherwise	70	@return true if this or equivalent encoding is available, false otherwise
Lines 73-78 Link Here
73	wxString *text = NULL,	73	wxString *text = NULL,
74	bool mayAskUser = false);	74	bool mayAskUser = false);
75		75
		76	/**
		77	Create a font from the given native font description or font family and
		78	size.
		79
		80	Notice that if neither of the parameters is specified (description is empty
		81	and the other ones are -1), an invalid font is returned and the caller
		82	should check for it and avoid using it in this case to avoid overriding the
		83	default system font if the user didn't set any specific font to use.
		84
		85	@param fontDesc opaque string returned by wxFont::GetNativeFontInfoDesc()
		86	@param fontSize font size, -1 if not specified
		87	@param fontFamily font family, wxFONTFAMILY_DEFAULT if not specified
		88	@return font which may be invalid, to be checked by the caller
		89	*/
		90	extern wxFont
		91	CreateFontFromDesc(const String& fontDesc, int fontSize, int fontFamily);
		92
		93
76	// Prevent MEvent dispatch inside wxYield	94	// Prevent MEvent dispatch inside wxYield
77	extern int g_busyCursorYield;	95	extern int g_busyCursorYield;
78		96
Lines 86-89 Link Here
86	~MBusyCursor() { MEndBusyCursor(); }	104	~MBusyCursor() { MEndBusyCursor(); }
87	};	105	};
88		106
89	#endif // GUIDEF_H	107	#endif // M_GUIDEF_H_




// Author:      Karsten Ballüder
// Modified by: Vadim Zeitlin at 22.08.01 to use MOption class
// Created:     1997
// CVS-ID:      $Id: Mdefaults.h,v 1.260 2006/08/19 13:11:59 vadz Exp $
// Copyright:   (c) 1997-2001 Mahogany team
// Licence:     M licence
///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////


class Profile;

// under Windows 12pt font looks too huge, letters are like in a book for
// children
#ifdef OS_WIN
#  define DEFAULT_FONT_SIZE 10l
#else
#  define DEFAULT_FONT_SIZE 12l
#endif

/** @name Levels of  interaction, do something or not?

    NB: these values can't be changed as they are written to (and read from)




// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
// Modified by:
// Created:     23.08.01
// CVS-ID:      $Id: Moptions.h,v 1.106 2006/08/19 13:11:59 vadz Exp $
// Copyright:   (c) 2001 Vadim Zeitlin
// Licence:     M licence
///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////

/// message view title
#define   MP_MVIEW_TITLE_FMT_DEFVAL   _("from $from about \"$subject\"")
/// which font to use
#define   MP_MVIEW_FONT_DEFVAL         0L
/// which font size
#define   MP_MVIEW_FONT_SIZE_DEFVAL         -1
/// the full font desc (replaces the 2 settings above)
#define   MP_MVIEW_FONT_DESC_DEFVAL   wxEmptyString
/// which foreground colour for the font

/**@name  Font settings for message view */
//@{
/// which font to use
#define   MP_FVIEW_FONT_DEFVAL         0L
/// which font size
#define   MP_FVIEW_FONT_SIZE_DEFVAL         -1
/// the full font desc (replaces the 2 settings above)
#define   MP_FVIEW_FONT_DESC_DEFVAL   wxEmptyString
/// don't show full e-mail, only sender's name

/**@name Font settings for compose view */
//@{
/// which font to use
#define   MP_CVIEW_FONT_DEFVAL         0L
/// which font size
#define   MP_CVIEW_FONT_SIZE_DEFVAL    -1
/// the full font desc (replaces the 2 settings above)
#define   MP_CVIEW_FONT_DESC_DEFVAL   wxEmptyString
/// which foreground colour for the font




///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
// Project:     M - cross platform e-mail GUI client
// File name:   include/sysutil.h
// Purpose:     utility functions for various OS-level functionality
// Author:      Karsten Ballüder, Vadim Zeitlin
// Created:     1999
// CVS-ID:      $Id: sysutil.h,v 1.11 2006/08/31 23:45:05 vadz Exp $
// Copyright:   (c) 1999 Karsten Ballüder
//              (c) 2000-2006 Vadim Zeitlin <vadim@wxwindows.org>
// Licence:     M license
///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////

#ifndef M_SYSUTIL_H
#define M_SYSUTIL_H
#define SYSUTIL_H

#ifndef  USE_PCH
#endif // USE_PCH

#include <wx/filename.h>


class MTempFileName
{
public:
   /**
      Ctor creates a temporary file name and possibly associates it with the
      specified file.

      If the temp file name is used for writing some data to it, the file
      parameter must be specified as otherwise the operation wouldn't be atomic
      and race conditions could occur. Do close the file before this object
      goes out of scope in this case though as otherwise we could fail to
      delete the temp file under Windows.

      @param file if non-NULL, the file to open (for writing) with the
                  temporary file name
    */
   MTempFileName(wxFile *file = NULL)
      : m_name(wxFileName::CreateTempFileName(_T("Mahogany"), file))
   {
      m_keepFile = false;
   }

   /**
      Ctor from an existing temporary file name.

      The specified file will be deleted when this object is destroyed unless
      Ok() is called.

      @param name of the existing temporary file
    */
   MTempFileName(const String& name) : m_name(name)
   {
      m_keepFile = false;
   }

   /// Returns false if temp file name couldn't be generated
   bool IsOk() const { return !m_name.empty(); }

   /// Get the name of the temp file
   const String& GetName() const { return m_name; }

   /// Tells us not to delete the temp file
   void Ok() { m_keepFile = true; }

   ~MTempFileName()
   {
      if ( !m_keepFile && !m_name.empty() )
      {
         if ( wxRemove(m_name) != 0 )
         {


private:
   String m_name;
   bool   m_keepFile;
};

//@}

#endif // M_SYSUTIL_H


Lines 5-11 Link Here

(-)mahogany-0.67/src/adb/AdbFrame.cpp (-2 / +2 lines)
5	// Author: Vadim Zeitlin	5	// Author: Vadim Zeitlin
6	// Modified by:	6	// Modified by:
7	// Created: 09.08.98	7	// Created: 09.08.98
8	// CVS-ID: $Id: AdbFrame.cpp,v 1.121 2006/01/16 20:32:26 nerijus Exp $	8	// CVS-ID: $Id: AdbFrame.cpp,v 1.122 2006/08/25 16:06:53 vadz Exp $
9	// Copyright: (c) 1998 Vadim Zeitlin <zeitlin@dptmaths.ens-cachan.fr>	9	// Copyright: (c) 1998 Vadim Zeitlin <zeitlin@dptmaths.ens-cachan.fr>
10	// Licence: M license	10	// Licence: M license
11	///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////	11	///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
Lines 3166-3172 Link Here
3166		3166
3167	wxAdbTree::wxAdbTree(wxAdbEditFrame frame, wxWindow parent, long id)	3167	wxAdbTree::wxAdbTree(wxAdbEditFrame frame, wxWindow parent, long id)
3168	: wxTreeCtrl(parent, id, wxDefaultPosition, wxDefaultSize,	3168	: wxTreeCtrl(parent, id, wxDefaultPosition, wxDefaultSize,
3169	wxTR_HAS_BUTTONS \| wxSUNKEN_BORDER)	3169	wxTR_DEFAULT_STYLE \| wxSUNKEN_BORDER)
3170	{	3170	{
3171	m_frame = frame;	3171	m_frame = frame;
3172	m_menu = NULL;	3172	m_menu = NULL;




// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin (based on gui/MessageView.cpp by Karsten)
// Modified by:
// Created:     24.07.01
// CVS-ID:      $Id: MessageView.cpp,v 1.175 2006/08/23 15:41:53 vadz Exp $
// Copyright:   (c) 2001 Mahogany Team
// Licence:     Mahogany license
///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////


wxFont MessageView::AllProfileValues::GetFont(wxFontEncoding encoding) const
{
   wxFont font(CreateFontFromDesc(fontDesc, fontSize, fontFamily));

   // assume that wxFONTENCODING_DEFAULT (US-ASCII) text can be shown in any
   // encoding
   if ( encoding != wxFONTENCODING_DEFAULT )
   {
      if ( !font.Ok() )
         font = *wxNORMAL_FONT;
      {
         font.SetNativeFontInfo(fontInfo);

      font.SetEncoding(encoding);
         // true for all normal fonts
         if ( font.Ok() &&
               (encoding != wxFONTENCODING_DEFAULT) &&
                  (encoding != wxFONTENCODING_ISO8859_1) )
         {
            font.SetEncoding(encoding);
         }
      }
   }

   if ( !font.Ok() )
   {
      font = wxFont(fontSize,
                    fontFamily,
                    wxFONTSTYLE_NORMAL,
                    wxFONTWEIGHT_NORMAL,
                    FALSE,   // not underlined
                    wxEmptyString,  // no specific face name
                    encoding);
   }

   return font;




 *                                                                  *
 * (C) 1999 by Karsten Ballüder (karsten@phy.hw.ac.uk)              *
 *                                                                  *
 * $Id: MModule.cpp,v 1.98 2006/08/25 15:59:30 vadz Exp $
 *******************************************************************/

/*

   wxDynamicLibrary *dll = module->GetDLL();

   // call cleanup function, if any
   if ( dll->HasSymbol(MMODULE_CLEANUP_FUNCTION) )
   {
      wxLogNull noLog;
      MModule_CleanUpFuncType funcCleanup =
         (MModule_CleanUpFuncType)dll->GetSymbol(MMODULE_CLEANUP_FUNCTION);
      if ( funcCleanup )

Lines 6-12 Link Here

(-)mahogany-0.67/src/gui/ClickURL.cpp (-5 / +9 lines)
6	// Author: Vadim Zeitlin	6	// Author: Vadim Zeitlin
7	// Modified by:	7	// Modified by:
8	// Created: 05.12.02 (extracted from MessageView.cpp and wxMessageView.cpp)	8	// Created: 05.12.02 (extracted from MessageView.cpp and wxMessageView.cpp)
9	// CVS-ID: $Id: ClickURL.cpp,v 1.24 2006/06/26 23:24:41 vadz Exp $	9	// CVS-ID: $Id: ClickURL.cpp,v 1.26 2006/08/31 17:59:27 nerijus Exp $
10	// Copyright: (c) 2001-2002 Mahogany Team	10	// Copyright: (c) 2001-2002 Mahogany Team
11	// Licence: Mahogany license	11	// Licence: Mahogany license
12	///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////	12	///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
Lines 48-53 Link Here
48	#include "Collect.h"	48	#include "Collect.h"
49		49
50	#include <wx/clipbrd.h>	50	#include <wx/clipbrd.h>
		51	#include <wx/mimetype.h>
51		52
52	#ifdef OS_UNIX	53	#ifdef OS_UNIX
53	#include <sys/stat.h>	54	#include <sys/stat.h>
Lines 260-268 Link Here
260	}	261	}
261	else	262	else
262	{	263	{
		264	#ifdef DEBUG_nerijus
263	wxTheClipboard->UsePrimarySelection();	265	wxTheClipboard->UsePrimarySelection();
264	wxTheClipboard->SetData(new	266	wxTheClipboard->SetData(new wxTextDataObject(m_clickableURL->GetUrl()));
265	wxTextDataObject(m_clickableURL->GetUrl()));	267	#endif
		268	wxURLDataObject *dobj = new wxURLDataObject;
		269	dobj->SetURL(m_clickableURL->GetUrl());
		270	wxTheClipboard->SetData(dobj);
266	}	271	}
267	}	272	}
268	break;	273	break;
Lines 500-507 Link Here
500	// either not netscape or ns isn't running or we have non-UNIX	505	// either not netscape or ns isn't running or we have non-UNIX
501	if(! bOk)	506	if(! bOk)
502	{	507	{
503	command = browser;	508	String command = wxFileType::ExpandCommand(browser, m_url);
504	command << _T(' ') << m_url;
505		509
506	wxString errmsg;	510	wxString errmsg;
507	errmsg.Printf(_("Couldn't launch browser: '%s' failed"),	511	errmsg.Printf(_("Couldn't launch browser: '%s' failed"),




// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
// Modified by:
// Created:     24.12.98
// CVS-ID:      $Id: wxBrowseButton.cpp,v 1.44 2006/08/31 23:18:28 vadz Exp $
// Copyright:   (c) 1998 Vadim Zeitlin <zeitlin@dptmaths.ens-cachan.fr>
///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////


{
}

// FIXME: these methods rely on internals of wxNativeFontInfo because they
//        know that it prepends the format version number (currently 0) to
//        the real font desc string - they shouldn't but we should add methods
//        to wxNativeFontInfo to do this conversion instead!

String wxFontBrowseButton::FontDescToUser(const String& desc)
{
   String user = desc;
   if ( user.length() > 2 && user[0u] == '0' && user[1u] == ';' )
   {
      user.erase(0, 2);
   }

   return user;
}

String wxFontBrowseButton::FontDescFromUser(const String& user)
{
   String desc;
   if ( !user.empty() )
   {
      desc = _T("0;");
   }

   desc += user;

   return desc;
}

void wxFontBrowseButton::DoBrowse()
{
   wxFont font;

   wxString desc = GetText();
   if ( !desc.empty() )
   {
      if ( fontInfo.FromString(desc) )
      {
         font.SetNativeFontInfo(fontInfo);
      }

   {
      font = dialog.GetFontData().GetChosenFont();

      SetText(font.GetNativeFontInfoDesc());
   }
}





// Author:      Karsten Ballüder, Vadim Zeitlin
// Modified by:
// Created:     1998
// CVS-ID:      $Id: wxComposeView.cpp,v 1.418 2006/08/25 13:25:48 vadz Exp $
// Copyright:   (c) 1998-2001 Mahogany team
// Licence:     M license
///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////


wxFont ComposerOptions::GetFont() const
{
   return CreateFontFromDesc(m_font, m_fontSize, m_fontFamily);
   if ( !m_font.empty() )
   {
      wxNativeFontInfo fontInfo;
      if ( fontInfo.FromString(m_font) )
      {
         font.SetNativeFontInfo(fontInfo);
      }
   }

   if ( !font.Ok() )
   {
      font = wxFont(m_fontSize,
                    m_fontFamily,
                    wxFONTSTYLE_NORMAL,
                    wxFONTWEIGHT_NORMAL);
   }

   return font;
}

// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------

   {
      text->SetForegroundColour(m_options.m_fg);
      text->SetBackgroundColour(m_options.m_bg);
      wxFont font(m_options.GetFont());
      if ( font.Ok() )
         text->SetFont(font);

      wxSizer *sizer = text->GetContainingSizer();
      if ( sizer )

         // we have a handy function in wxFileType which will replace
         // '%s' with the file name or add the file name at the end if
         // there is no '%s'
         String
            command = wxFileType::ExpandCommand(extEdit, tmpFileName.GetName());

         // do start the external process
         m_procExtEdit = new wxProcess(this, HelperProcess_Editor);

      }
      else // non empty file
      {
         wxStringBuffer buf(text, lenFile + 1);
         buf[lenFile] = '\0';

         ok = file.Read(p, lenFile) != wxInvalidOffset;

         ok = file.Read(buf, lenFile) != wxInvalidOffset;
      }
   }


   return true;
}

/// inserts a text
void
wxComposeView::InsertText(const String &text)
{
   // the text here may come from a file and so can be in an encoding different
   // from the one we currently use, but we -- unfortunately -- have no way of
   // knowing about it, except in the special case when we use UTF-8 and then
   // we must check if text is a valid UTF-8 string as otherwise inserting it
   // is going to fail
   String textCopy;
   if ( wxLocale::GetSystemEncoding() == wxFONTENCODING_UTF8 )
   {
      if ( wxConvUTF8.MB2WC(NULL, text, 0) == (size_t)-1 )
      {
         // not a valid UTF-8 string, must suppose it's in some other encoding
         // and as we have no idea about what it is, choose latin1 as the most
         // common (among Mahogany users, anyhow)
         if ( m_encoding == wxFONTENCODING_SYSTEM )
         {
            // change the encoding to latin1 if none explicitly specified
            SetEncoding(wxFONTENCODING_ISO8859_1);
         }
         else // we already have an existing encoding
         {
            // transform the text from latin1 to the current encoding
            textCopy = wxCSConv(m_encoding).cWC2MB(wxConvISO8859_1.cMB2WC(text));
         }
      }
   }

   m_editor->InsertText(textCopy.empty() ? text : textCopy,
                        MessageEditor::Insert_Append);
}

void

Lines 5-11 Link Here

(-)mahogany-0.67/src/gui/wxFolderTree.cpp (-2 / +2 lines)
5	// Author: Vadim Zeitlin	5	// Author: Vadim Zeitlin
6	// Modified by:	6	// Modified by:
7	// Created: 03.10.98	7	// Created: 03.10.98
8	// CVS-ID: $Id: wxFolderTree.cpp,v 1.243 2006/06/28 12:46:34 vadz Exp $	8	// CVS-ID: $Id: wxFolderTree.cpp,v 1.244 2006/08/19 14:22:53 vadz Exp $
9	// Copyright: (c) 1998 Vadim Zeitlin <zeitlin@dptmaths.ens-cachan.fr>	9	// Copyright: (c) 1998 Vadim Zeitlin <zeitlin@dptmaths.ens-cachan.fr>
10	// Licence: M license	10	// Licence: M license
11	///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////	11	///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
Lines 1754-1760 Link Here
1754	wxWindow *parent, wxWindowID id,	1754	wxWindow *parent, wxWindowID id,
1755	const wxPoint& pos, const wxSize& size)	1755	const wxPoint& pos, const wxSize& size)
1756	: wxPTreeCtrl(_T("FolderTree"), parent, id, pos, size,	1756	: wxPTreeCtrl(_T("FolderTree"), parent, id, pos, size,
1757	wxTR_HAS_BUTTONS \| wxTR_EDIT_LABELS)	1757	wxTR_DEFAULT_STYLE \| wxTR_EDIT_LABELS)
1758	{	1758	{
1759	// init member vars	1759	// init member vars
1760	m_current = NULL;	1760	m_current = NULL;




// Author:      Karsten Ballüder (Ballueder@gmx.net)
// Modified by: VZ at 13.07.01: use virtual list control, update on demand
// Created:     1997
// CVS-ID:      $Id: wxFolderView.cpp,v 1.683 2006/08/19 13:12:00 vadz Exp $
// Copyright:   (c) 1997-2001 Mahogany team
// Licence:     M license
///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////

   SetTextColour( fg );
   SetBackgroundColour( bg );

   wxFont font(CreateFontFromDesc(fontDesc, fontSize, fontFamily));
   if ( font.Ok() )
   {
      SetFont(font);
      if ( fontInfo.FromString(fontDesc) )
      {
         font.SetNativeFontInfo(fontInfo);
      }
   }

   if ( !font.Ok() )
   {
      font = wxFont(fontSize, fontFamily,
                    wxFONTSTYLE_NORMAL, wxFONTWEIGHT_NORMAL);
   }

   SetFont(font);

   if ( memcmp(m_columns, columns, sizeof(m_columns)) != 0 )
   {
      // the control must be recreated if the order of columns changed

         }
         break;

      case WXK_UP:
      case WXK_DOWN:
      case WXK_HOME:
      case WXK_END:
      case WXK_RETURN:
#if !defined DEBUG_nerijus
      case WXK_SPACE:
#endif
         // let the control process these keys as they're used for navigation
         event.Skip();
         return false;

      default:
         // pressing any alphanumeric character in the list control starts
         // incremental search in it which is worse than useless in our case
         // because it's never going to find anything (the first column is
         // always flags in this case and won't match...) and we just lose the
         // current selection, so prevent this from happening by *not* calling
         // event.Skip() in this case
         if ( key >= 0x7f || !isalnum(key) )
         {
            // let the control process other keys (some are used for navigation
            // in it)
            event.Skip();
            return false;
         }
   }

   if ( cmd )




 *                                                                  *
 * (C) 1997-1999 by Karsten Ballüder (ballueder@gmx.net)            *
 *                                                                  *
 * $Id: wxIconManager.cpp,v 1.112 2006/08/25 16:23:13 vadz Exp $
 *******************************************************************/

// ============================================================================

      return icon;

   // next step: try to load the icon files .png,.xpm,.gif:
   bool found = false;
   if(m_GlobalDir.Length())
   {
      PathFinder pf(READ_APPCONFIG(MP_ICONPATH));

#ifdef M_TOP_SOURCEDIR
      // look in the source directory to make it possible to use the program
      // without installing it
      pf.AddPaths(String(M_TOP_SOURCEDIR) + _T("/src/icons"));
      pf.AddPaths(String(M_TOP_SOURCEDIR) + _T("/res"));
#endif // M_TOP_SOURCEDIR

      pf.AddPaths(m_GlobalDir, false);

      String name;
      for ( int ext = 0; wxIconManagerFileExtensions[ext]; ext++ )
      {
         // use iconNameOrig here to preserve the original case
         name = pf.FindFile(iconNameOrig + wxIconManagerFileExtensions[ext]);
         name = pf.FindFile(name, &found);

         // but if it's not found, also fall back to the usual lower case
         if ( name.empty() )
         {
            name = pf.FindFile(iconName + wxIconManagerFileExtensions[ext]);
         }

         if ( !name.empty() )
         {
            ms_IconPath = name.BeforeLast('/');





// Author:      Karsten Ballüder, Vadim Zeitlin
// Modified by:
// Created:     1997
// CVS-ID:      $Id: wxMApp.cpp,v 1.309 2006/09/02 12:41:30 vadz Exp $
// Copyright:   (c) 1997-2002 M-Team
// Licence:     M license
///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////

bool
wxMApp::OnInit()
{
   // we want our OnAbnormalTermination() be called if we crash but don't use
   // it in debug builds as it interferes with the debugger
#if wxUSE_ON_FATAL_EXCEPTION && !defined(__WXDEBUG__)
   wxHandleFatalExceptions();
#endif


   }
#endif // USE_I18N

   // wxLocale::GetSystemEncoding() is broken in wx <= 2.6.3, it returns
   // ISO-8859-1 for UTF-8 locale
#if defined(__WXGTK20__) && wxCHECK_VERSION(2, 6, 4)
   // we need UTF-8 support to be able to work with messages in different
   // encodings
   if ( wxLocale::GetSystemEncoding() != wxFONTENCODING_UTF8 )
   {
      // TODO: set encoding to UTF-8 (but keeping the current language)
      //       ourselves
      wxLogWarning(_("Your current locale doesn't use UTF-8 encoding!\n"
                     "\n"
                     "This means that Mahogany will not be able to work "
                     "with texts in encodings other than the default one\n"
                     "which may result in messages not being displayed or "
                     "even sent correctly.\n"
                     "\n"
                     "Please change the system locale to UTF-8."));
   }
#endif // GTK+ 2.0

   wxInitAllImageHandlers();
   wxFileSystem::AddHandler(new wxMemoryFSHandler);
//   wxFileSystem::AddHandler(new wxZipFSHandler); // for zipped docs

   return true;
}

// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
// global functions implemented here
// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------

extern bool EnsureAvailableTextEncoding(wxFontEncoding *enc,
                                        wxString *text,
                                        bool mayAskUser)
{
   CHECK( enc, false, _T("CheckEncodingAvailability: NULL encoding") );

   if ( !wxFontMapper::Get()->IsEncodingAvailable(*enc) )
   {
      // try to find another encoding
      wxFontEncoding encAlt;
      if ( wxFontMapper::Get()->
            GetAltForEncoding(*enc, &encAlt, wxEmptyString, mayAskUser) )
      {
         // translate the text (if any) to the equivalent encoding
         if ( text && !text->empty() )
         {
#if wxUSE_WCHAR_T
            // try converting via Unicode
            wxCSConv a2w(*enc);
            wxWCharBuffer wbuf(a2w.cMB2WC(text->c_str()));
            if ( *wbuf )
            {
               // special case of UTF-8 which is used all the time under wxGTK
               if ( encAlt == wxFONTENCODING_UTF8 )
               {
                  *text = wxConvUTF8.cWC2MB(wbuf);
               }
               else // all the other encodings, use generic converter
               {
                  wxCSConv w2a(encAlt);
                  *text = w2a.cWC2MB(wbuf);
               }

               if ( !text->empty() )
                  return true;
               //else: fall back to wxEncodingConverter
            }
            //else: conversion to Unicode failed
#endif // wxUSE_WCHAR_T

            wxEncodingConverter conv;
            if ( !conv.Init(*enc, encAlt) )
            {
               // failed to convert the text
               return false;
            }

            *text = conv.Convert(*text);
         }
         //else: just return the encoding

         *enc = encAlt;
      }
      else // no equivalent encoding
      {
         return false;
      }
   }

   // we have either the requested encoding or an equivalent one
   return true;
}

// ============================================================================
// IPC and multiple program instances handling
// ============================================================================

Lines 3-9 Link Here

(-)mahogany-0.67/src/gui/wxMDialogs.cpp (-4 / +6 lines)
3	* *	3	* *
4	* (C) 1998-2000 by Karsten Ballüder (karsten@phy.hw.ac.uk) *	4	* (C) 1998-2000 by Karsten Ballüder (karsten@phy.hw.ac.uk) *
5	* *	5	* *
6	* $Id: wxMDialogs.cpp,v 1.433 2006/08/06 20:02:01 vadz Exp $	6	* $Id: wxMDialogs.cpp,v 1.435 2006/08/25 16:22:46 vadz Exp $
7	*******************************************************************/	7	*******************************************************************/
8		8
9	#ifdef __GNUG__	9	#ifdef __GNUG__
Lines 2163-2170 Link Here
2163	MH_DIALOG_LICENSE);	2163	MH_DIALOG_LICENSE);
2164	wxHtmlWindow *license = new wxHtmlWindow(this);	2164	wxHtmlWindow *license = new wxHtmlWindow(this);
2165		2165
2166	wxBitmap bmp(mApplication->GetIconManager()-> GetBitmap(_T("Msplash")));	2166	wxBitmap bmp(mApplication->GetIconManager()->GetBitmap(_T("Msplash")));
2167	const int w = bmp.Ok() ? bmp.GetWidth() : 400;	2167	int w = bmp.Ok() ? bmp.GetWidth() : 0;
		2168	if ( w < 400 )
		2169	w = 400;
2168		2170
2169	wxMemoryFSHandler::AddFile(_T("splash.png"), bmp, wxBITMAP_TYPE_PNG);	2171	wxMemoryFSHandler::AddFile(_T("splash.png"), bmp, wxBITMAP_TYPE_PNG);
2170		2172
Lines 2740-2746 Link Here
2740	m_frame->CentreOnParent();	2742	m_frame->CentreOnParent();
2741	m_frame->Show();	2743	m_frame->Show();
2742		2744
2743	wxYield();	2745	m_frame->Update();
2744	}	2746	}
2745		2747
2746	void MProgressInfo::SetLabel(const wxString& label)	2748	void MProgressInfo::SetLabel(const wxString& label)




///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
// Project:     M - cross platform e-mail GUI client
// File name:   gui/wxMGuiUtils.cpp
// Purpose:     miscellaneous GUI helpers
// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
// Created:     2006-08-19
// CVS-ID:      $Id: wxMGuiUtils.cpp,v 1.1 2006/08/19 13:12:00 vadz Exp $
// Copyright:   (c) 2006 Vadim Zeitlin
// Licence:     M license
///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////

// ============================================================================
// declarations
// ============================================================================

// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
// headers
// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------

#include "Mpch.h"

#ifndef  USE_PCH
#  include "Mcommon.h"
#  include "guidef.h"

#  include <wx/fontmap.h>
#endif // USE_PCH

#include <wx/encconv.h>

// ============================================================================
// implementation
// ============================================================================

bool
EnsureAvailableTextEncoding(wxFontEncoding *enc, wxString *text, bool mayAskUser)
{
   CHECK( enc, false, _T("CheckEncodingAvailability: NULL encoding") );

   if ( !wxFontMapper::Get()->IsEncodingAvailable(*enc) )
   {
      // try to find another encoding
      wxFontEncoding encAlt;
      if ( wxFontMapper::Get()->
            GetAltForEncoding(*enc, &encAlt, wxEmptyString, mayAskUser) )
      {
         // translate the text (if any) to the equivalent encoding
         if ( text && !text->empty() )
         {
#if wxUSE_WCHAR_T
            // try converting via Unicode
            wxCSConv a2w(*enc);
            wxWCharBuffer wbuf(a2w.cMB2WC(text->c_str()));
            if ( *wbuf )
            {
               // special case of UTF-8 which is used all the time under wxGTK
               if ( encAlt == wxFONTENCODING_UTF8 )
               {
                  *text = wxConvUTF8.cWC2MB(wbuf);
               }
               else // all the other encodings, use generic converter
               {
                  wxCSConv w2a(encAlt);
                  *text = w2a.cWC2MB(wbuf);
               }

               if ( !text->empty() )
                  return true;
               //else: fall back to wxEncodingConverter
            }
            //else: conversion to Unicode failed
#endif // wxUSE_WCHAR_T

            wxEncodingConverter conv;
            if ( !conv.Init(*enc, encAlt) )
            {
               // failed to convert the text
               return false;
            }

            *text = conv.Convert(*text);
         }
         //else: just return the encoding

         *enc = encAlt;
      }
      else // no equivalent encoding
      {
         return false;
      }
   }

   // we have either the requested encoding or an equivalent one
   return true;
}

wxFont
CreateFontFromDesc(const String& fontDesc, int fontSize, int fontFamily)
{
   wxFont font;

   // use the native font description if we have it
   if ( !fontDesc.empty() )
   {
      wxNativeFontInfo fontInfo;
      if ( fontInfo.FromString(fontDesc) )
      {
         font.SetNativeFontInfo(fontInfo);
      }
   }

   // if we don't, or if creating font from it failed, create the font with the
   // given size and family if we have [either of] them
   if ( !font.Ok() && (fontSize != -1 || fontFamily != -1) )
   {
      font = wxFont
             (
               fontSize == -1 ? wxNORMAL_FONT->GetPointSize()
                              : fontSize,
               fontFamily == wxFONTFAMILY_DEFAULT ? wxNORMAL_FONT->GetFamily()
                                                  : fontFamily,
               wxFONTSTYLE_NORMAL,
               wxFONTWEIGHT_NORMAL
             );
   }

   return font;
}





// Purpose:     splash screen/about dialog implementation
// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
// Created:     2006-06-04 (extracted from wxMDialogs.cpp)
// CVS-ID:      $Id: wxMSplash.cpp,v 1.6 2006/08/31 23:09:06 nerijus Exp $
// Copyright:   (c) 1998-2006 Vadim Zeitlin <vadim@wxwindows.org>
// Licence:     M license
///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////

   wxStaticBitmap *top = new wxStaticBitmap(this, wxID_ANY, bmp,
                                            wxPoint(0, 0), sizeBmp);
   wxHtmlWindow *bottom = new wxHtmlWindow(this, wxID_ANY,
                                           wxPoint(0, sizeBmp.y + 1), sizeBmp,
                                           wxHW_DEFAULT_STYLE | wxHW_NO_SELECTION);

   ConnectMouseAndKeyEvents(top);
   ConnectMouseAndKeyEvents(bottom);

   wxString pageHtmlText;

   pageHtmlText << _T("<body text=#000000 bgcolor=#ffffff>"
                   "<meta HTTP-EQUIV=\"Content-Type\" CONTENT=\"text/html;charset=UTF-8\">"
                   "<font face=\"Times New Roman,times\">"

                   "<h4>") << _("Mahogany information") << _T("</h4>")

                << "<p>"
                   _T("<h4>") << _("List of contributors:") << _T("</h4>")
                   "<p>"
                   "Karsten Ball" "\xC3\xBC" "der, Vadim Zeitlin, Greg Noel,<br>"
                   "Nerijus Bali" "\xC5\xAB" "nas, Xavier Nodet, Vaclav Slavik,<br>"
                   "Daniel Seifert, Michele Ravani, Michael A Chase,<br>"
                   "Robert Vazan " << _("and many others") << "<br>"
                   "<br>"




// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
// Modified by:
// Created:     20.08.98
// CVS-ID:      $Id: wxOptionsDlg.cpp,v 1.431 2006/08/31 23:18:28 vadz Exp $
// Copyright:   (c) 1998 Vadim Zeitlin <zeitlin@dptmaths.ens-cachan.fr>
// Licence:     M license
///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////

               strValue = strutil_decrypt(strValue);

         case Field_Font:
            strValue = wxFontBrowseButton::FontDescToUser(strValue);
            // fall through

         case Field_Dir:
         case Field_File:
         case Field_Folder:

            // post processing is needed for some fields
            if ( fieldType == Field_Passwd )
               strValue = strutil_encrypt(strValue);
            else if ( fieldType == Field_Font )
               strValue = wxFontBrowseButton::FontDescFromUser(strValue);
            else if ( fieldType == Field_Number ) {
               wxASSERT( m_aDefaults[n].IsNumeric() );


Lines 6-12 Link Here

(-)mahogany-0.67/src/gui/wxTemplateDialog.cpp (-5 / +17 lines)
6	// Author: Vadim Zeitlin	6	// Author: Vadim Zeitlin
7	// Modified by: VZ at 09.05.00 to allow editing all templates	7	// Modified by: VZ at 09.05.00 to allow editing all templates
8	// Created: 16.07.99	8	// Created: 16.07.99
9	// CVS-ID: $Id: wxTemplateDialog.cpp,v 1.42 2006/01/16 20:32:28 nerijus Exp $	9	// CVS-ID: $Id: wxTemplateDialog.cpp,v 1.43 2006/08/19 14:49:52 vadz Exp $
10	// Copyright: (c) 1999 Vadim Zeitlin <zeitlin@dptmaths.ens-cachan.fr>	10	// Copyright: (c) 1999 Vadim Zeitlin <zeitlin@dptmaths.ens-cachan.fr>
11	// Licence: M license	11	// Licence: M license
12	///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////	12	///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
Lines 527-536 Link Here
527	listbox->Append(wxGetTranslation(gs_templateNames[n]));	527	listbox->Append(wxGetTranslation(gs_templateNames[n]));
528	}	528	}
529		529
		530	int wLbox = listbox->GetBestSize().x;
		531	if ( wLbox > 3*wBtn )
		532	wLbox = 3*wBtn;
		533
530	c = new wxLayoutConstraints;	534	c = new wxLayoutConstraints;
531	c->top.Below(msg, LAYOUT_Y_MARGIN);	535	c->top.Below(msg, LAYOUT_Y_MARGIN);
532	c->left.SameAs(box, wxLeft, 2*LAYOUT_X_MARGIN);	536	c->left.SameAs(box, wxLeft, 2*LAYOUT_X_MARGIN);
533	c->width.AsIs();	537	c->width.Absolute(wLbox);
534	c->height.Absolute(5*hBtn);	538	c->height.Absolute(5*hBtn);
535	listbox->SetConstraints(c);	539	listbox->SetConstraints(c);
536		540
Lines 612-618 Link Here
612	{	616	{
613	m_kind = kind;	617	m_kind = kind;
614		618
615	SetDefaultSize(6wBtn, 10hBtn);	619	SetDefaultSize(10wBtn, 10hBtn);
616	}	620	}
617		621
618	bool wxTemplatesDialogBase::TransferDataToWindow()	622	bool wxTemplatesDialogBase::TransferDataToWindow()
Lines 755-765 Link Here
755	// now lay them out	759	// now lay them out
756	// ----------------	760	// ----------------
757		761
		762	int wLbox = m_listbox->GetBestSize().x;
		763	if ( wLbox > 3*wBtn )
		764	wLbox = 3*wBtn;
		765
758	wxLayoutConstraints *c;	766	wxLayoutConstraints *c;
759	c = new wxLayoutConstraints;	767	c = new wxLayoutConstraints;
760	c->left.SameAs(box, wxLeft, 2*LAYOUT_X_MARGIN);	768	c->left.SameAs(box, wxLeft, 2*LAYOUT_X_MARGIN);
761	c->top.SameAs(box, wxTop, 4*LAYOUT_Y_MARGIN);	769	c->top.SameAs(box, wxTop, 4*LAYOUT_Y_MARGIN);
762	c->width.AsIs();	770	c->width.Absolute(wLbox);
763	c->bottom.SameAs(box, wxBottom, 2*LAYOUT_Y_MARGIN);	771	c->bottom.SameAs(box, wxBottom, 2*LAYOUT_Y_MARGIN);
764	m_listbox->SetConstraints(c);	772	m_listbox->SetConstraints(c);
765		773
Lines 887-896 Link Here
887	// constraints	895	// constraints
888	FillListBox();	896	FillListBox();
889		897
		898	int wLbox = m_listbox->GetBestSize().x;
		899	if ( wLbox > 3*wBtn )
		900	wLbox = 3*wBtn;
		901
890	c = new wxLayoutConstraints;	902	c = new wxLayoutConstraints;
891	c->top.Below(combo, 2*LAYOUT_Y_MARGIN);	903	c->top.Below(combo, 2*LAYOUT_Y_MARGIN);
892	c->left.SameAs(msg, wxLeft, 2*LAYOUT_X_MARGIN);	904	c->left.SameAs(msg, wxLeft, 2*LAYOUT_X_MARGIN);
893	c->width.AsIs();	905	c->width.Absolute(wLbox);
894	c->bottom.SameAs(box, wxBottom, 2*LAYOUT_Y_MARGIN);	906	c->bottom.SameAs(box, wxBottom, 2*LAYOUT_Y_MARGIN);
895	m_listbox->SetConstraints(c);	907	m_listbox->SetConstraints(c);
896		908




// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
// Modified by:
// Created:     14.02.03 (extracted from src/gui/wxMDialogs.cpp)
// CVS-ID:      $Id: wxTextDialog.cpp,v 1.14 2006/08/24 17:58:37 vadz Exp $
// Copyright:   (c) 2001-2003 Vadim Zeitlin
// Licence:     M licence
///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////


   m_configPath = configPath;

   // we may have or not the location in config where the dialogs position/size
   // are stored
   int x, y, w, h;
   if ( m_configPath )
   {
      wxMFrame::RestorePosition(configPath, &x, &y, &w, &h);
   }
   else
   {
      x =
      y = -1;
      w = 500;
      h = 300;
   }

   SetSize(x, y, w, h);

   // create controls
   // ---------------

   m_text = new wxTextCtrl(this, -1, wxEmptyString,
                           wxDefaultPosition,
                           wxDefaultSize,
                           wxTE_MULTILINE |
                           wxTE_READONLY |
                           wxTE_NOHIDESEL |
                           wxTE_RICH2);
   m_text->SetValue(text);

   // use fixed-width font and latin1 encoding in which all text is valid:
   // without encoding information (which wouldn't make sense anyhow as we can
   // have multiple parts using different encodings) we must do this to at
   // least show something to the user while using the default UTF-8 encoding
   // of GTK+ 2 could result in nothing being shown at all
   m_text->SetFont(wxFont(wxNORMAL_FONT->GetPointSize(), wxFONTFAMILY_TELETYPE,
                          wxFONTSTYLE_NORMAL, wxFONTWEIGHT_NORMAL,
                          false /* not underlined */, wxEmptyString,
                          wxFONTENCODING_ISO8859_1));

   // now that the encoding is set, we can show the text
   m_text->SetValue(text);

   // in TAB order we want "Save" to get focus before "Close", so create
   // them in order

   sizerTop->Add(m_text, 1, wxEXPAND);
   sizerTop->Add(sizerBtns, 0, wxCENTRE | wxTOP | wxBOTTOM, LAYOUT_Y_MARGIN);

   // set the sizer &c
   // ----------------

   SetSizer(sizerTop);
   SetAutoLayout(TRUE);

   // final initialization
   // --------------------
#ifdef __WXMSW__
   Layout();
#endif

   m_text->SetFocus();

   // under wxGTK SetFocus() scrolls the control to the bottom for some reason
   // while we always want to show the top of the message
   m_text->SetInsertionPoint(0);

   // we may have or not the location in config where the dialogs position/size
   // are stored
   int x, y, w, h;
   if ( m_configPath )
   {
      wxMFrame::RestorePosition(configPath, &x, &y, &w, &h);
   }
   else
   {
      x =
      y = -1;
      w = 500;
      h = 300;
   }

   SetSize(x, y, w, h);

   Show(TRUE);
}


Lines 178-202 Link Here

(-)mahogany-0.67/src/icons/adb_palmos.xpm (-21 / +16 lines)
178	"/. c #a4a8a8",	178	"/. c #a4a8a8",
179	"(. c #a8b6ad",	179	"(. c #a8b6ad",
180	/* pixels */	180	/* pixels */
181	" ",	181	"g g e.e.S.S._ J Y I ^ A.X.X.% % ",
182	" ",	182	"j j D D H H A r M 2 e -.=.=.@ @ ",
183	"g e.S._ J Y I ^ A.X.% ",	183	"5 5 $.$.V V L i.6.j.g.D..., , ",
184	"j D H A r M 2 e -.=.@ ",	184	"z z H.H.R.R.T.G.b.V.!.Q.p.p.4 4 ",
185	"5 $.V L i.6.j.g.D.*., ",	185	"b b n.n.1.1.z.M.9.f.Z.B.l.l.7 7 ",
186	"z H.R.T.G.b.V.!.Q.p.4 ",	186	"t t F.F.x.x.G U ] { r.g.y.y.9 9 ",
187	"b n.1.z.M.9.f.Z.B.l.7 ",	187	"< < L.L.t.t.5.4.2.>.v.C.%.%.q q ",
188	"t F.x.G U ] { r.g.y.9 ",	188	"a a P.P.( ( :.} ) m.a.d.3.3.w w ",
189	"< L.t.5.4.2.>.v.C.%.q ",	189	"p p u.u.[ [ S B P / F ,.+.+.8 8 ",
190	"a P.( :.} ) m.a.d.3.w ",	190	"k k ! ! ~ ~ s.<.o.;. .8.O.O.3 3 ",
191	"p u.[ S B P / F ,.+.8 ",	191	"d d N.N.....W./.^.~.(.' Q Q > > ",
192	"k ! ~ s.<.o.;. .8.O.3 ",	192	"y y #.#.R R U.I.E.K.Y.` T T = = ",
193	"d N...W./.^.~.(.' Q > ",	193	"1 1 \| \| &.&.@.c.k.q.7.h.W W # # ",
194	"y #.R U.I.E.K.Y.` T = ",	194	"h h v v $ $ o X + . * n n O O ",
195	"1 \| &.@.c.k.q.7.h.W # ",	195	"i i u u 0.0.K Z N l w.E J.J.: : ",
196	"h v $ o X + . * n O ",	196	"c c & & - - 0 x s f 6 ; m m C C ",
197	"i u 0.K Z N l w.E J.: ",
198	"c & - 0 x s f 6 ; m C ",
199	" ",
200	" ",
201	" ",
202	};	197	};

Lines 5-11 Link Here

(-)mahogany-0.67/src/mail/SendMessageCC.cpp (-17 / +27 lines)
5	// Author: Karsten Ballüder	5	// Author: Karsten Ballüder
6	// Modified by:	6	// Modified by:
7	// Created: 1998	7	// Created: 1998
8	// CVS-ID: $Id: SendMessageCC.cpp,v 1.233 2006/06/23 23:27:31 vadz Exp $	8	// CVS-ID: $Id: SendMessageCC.cpp,v 1.234 2006/08/31 23:45:33 vadz Exp $
9	// Copyright: (C) 1999-2001 by M-Team	9	// Copyright: (C) 1999-2001 by M-Team
10	// Licence: M license	10	// Licence: M license
11	///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////	11	///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
Lines 43-48 Link Here
43	#include "Message.h"	43	#include "Message.h"
44	#include "MFolder.h"	44	#include "MFolder.h"
45		45
		46	#ifdef OS_UNIX
		47	# include "sysutil.h"
		48	#endif // OS_UNIX
		49
46	// has to be included before SendMessage.h, as it includes windows.h which	50	// has to be included before SendMessage.h, as it includes windows.h which
47	// defines SendMessage under Windows	51	// defines SendMessage under Windows
48	#include <wx/fontmap.h> // for GetEncodingName()	52	#include <wx/fontmap.h> // for GetEncodingName()
Lines 1920-1927 Link Here
1920		1924
1921	// write to temp file:	1925	// write to temp file:
1922	wxFile out;	1926	wxFile out;
1923	const String filename = wxFileName::CreateTempFileName(	1927	MTempFileName tmpFN(&out);
1924	_T("Mtemp"), &out);	1928	const String& filename = tmpFN.GetName();
1925		1929
1926	bool success = false;	1930	bool success = false;
1927	if ( !filename.empty() )	1931	if ( !filename.empty() )
Lines 1930-1947 Link Here
1930	out.Close();	1934	out.Close();
1931	if ( written == lfOnly.Length() )	1935	if ( written == lfOnly.Length() )
1932	{	1936	{
1933	String command;	1937	int rc = system(m_SendmailCmd + " < " + filename);
1934	command.Printf(_T("%s < '%s'; exec /bin/rm -f '%s'"),	1938	if ( WEXITSTATUS(rc) != 0 )
1935	m_SendmailCmd.c_str(),	1939	{
1936	filename.c_str(), filename.c_str());	1940	ERRORMESSAGE((_("Failed to execute local MTA \"%s\""),
1937	// HORRIBLE HACK: this should be `const char *' but wxExecute's	1941	m_SendmailCmd.c_str()));
1938	// prototype doesn't allow it...	1942	}
1939	wxChar *argv[4];	1943	else
1940	argv[0] = (wxChar *)"/bin/sh";	1944	{
1941	argv[1] = (wxChar *)"-c";	1945	success = true;
1942	argv[2] = (wxChar *)command.c_str();	1946	}
1943	argv[3] = 0; // NULL	1947	}
1944	success = wxExecute(argv) != 0;	1948	else
		1949	{
		1950	ERRORMESSAGE((_("Failed to write to temporary file \"%s\""),
		1951	filename.c_str()));
1945	}	1952	}
1946	}	1953	}
1947	else	1954	else
Lines 1961-1968 Link Here
1961	}	1968	}
1962	else	1969	else
1963	{	1970	{
1964	ERRORMESSAGE((_("Failed to send message via '%s'"),	1971	ERRORMESSAGE((_("Failed to send message via local MTA, maybe "
1965	m_SendmailCmd.c_str()));	1972	"it's not configured correctly?\n"
		1973	"\n"
		1974	"Please try using an SMTP server if you are not "
		1975	" sure.")));
1966	}	1976	}
1967		1977
1968	return success;	1978	return success;




// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
// Modified by:
// Created:     26.07.01
// CVS-ID:      $Id: HtmlViewer.cpp,v 1.78 2006/08/19 13:12:00 vadz Exp $
// Copyright:   (c) 2001 Vadim Zeitlin
// Licence:     M license
///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////

   // add "attr=#colour" attribute to m_htmlText if col is valid
   void AddColourAttr(const wxChar *attr, const wxColour& col);

   // calculate HTML font size for the given font
   int CalculateFontSize(const wxFont& font);

   // get the name of the virtual file for the n-th image we use
   wxString GetVirtualFileName(size_t n) const;

   }
}

int HtmlViewer::CalculateFontSize(const wxFont& font)
{
   if ( !font.Ok() )
   {
      // use default size
      return 0;
   }

   // map the point size into the HTML font size so that if the standard font
   // size is 12pt, 6pt is very small and 24pt is very big
   //
   // this is not very rigorous, of course...
   int diff = font.GetPointSize() - wxNORMAL_FONT->GetPointSize();
   if ( diff > 0 )
      diff /= 4;
   else

   // close <body> tag
   m_htmlText += _T(">");

   wxFont font(profileValues.GetFont());
   int diff = CalculateFontSize(font);
   int diff = CalculateFontSize(font.GetPointSize() - DEFAULT_FONT_SIZE);
   if ( diff )
   {
      m_htmlText << _T("<font size=") << wxString::Format(_T("%+d"), diff) << _T(">");

   // map the font family into HTML font face name
   //
   // TODO: use <font face="...">
   if ( font.Ok() && font.IsFixedWidth() )
   {
      m_htmlText << _T("<tt>");
      m_htmlEnd.Prepend(_T("</tt>"));


void HtmlViewer::ShowRawHeaders(const String& header)
{
   int diff = CalculateFontSize(GetOptions().GetFont());
   wxFont font = profileValues.GetFont();

   int diff = CalculateFontSize(font.GetPointSize() - DEFAULT_FONT_SIZE);
   m_htmlText << _T("<pre>") << _T("<font size=") << wxString::Format(_T("%+d"), diff) << _T(">")
              << MakeHtmlSafe(header) << _T("</font>") << _T("</pre>");
}




// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
// Modified by:
// Created:     2004-07-10 (mostly extracted from Filters.cpp)
// CVS-ID:      $Id: HeadersFilter.cpp,v 1.16 2006/08/25 10:47:57 vadz Exp $
// Copyright:   (c) 2004 Vadim Zeitlin <vadim@wxwindows.org>
// Licence:     M licence
///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////

   Spam_Test_HTML,
   Spam_Test_BadMIME,
   Spam_Test_ExeAttachment,
   Spam_Test_WhiteList,
#ifdef USE_RBL
   Spam_Test_RBL,
#endif // USE_RBL
   Spam_Test_WhiteList,

   Spam_Test_Max
};

Lines 5-11 Link Here

(-)mahogany-0.67/src/modules/TextViewer.cpp (-2 / +4 lines)
5	// Author: Vadim Zeitlin	5	// Author: Vadim Zeitlin
6	// Modified by:	6	// Modified by:
7	// Created: 26.07.01	7	// Created: 26.07.01
8	// CVS-ID: $Id: TextViewer.cpp,v 1.67 2006/01/16 20:32:28 nerijus Exp $	8	// CVS-ID: $Id: TextViewer.cpp,v 1.68 2006/08/19 13:12:00 vadz Exp $
9	// Copyright: (c) 2001 Vadim Zeitlin	9	// Copyright: (c) 2001 Vadim Zeitlin
10	// Licence: M license	10	// Licence: M license
11	///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////	11	///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
Lines 549-555 Link Here
549		549
550	const ProfileValues& profileValues = GetOptions();	550	const ProfileValues& profileValues = GetOptions();
551		551
552	m_window->SetFont(profileValues.GetFont());	552	wxFont font(profileValues.GetFont());
		553	if ( font.Ok() )
		554	m_window->SetFont(font);
553	m_window->SetForegroundColour(profileValues.FgCol);	555	m_window->SetForegroundColour(profileValues.FgCol);
554	m_window->SetBackgroundColour(profileValues.BgCol);	556	m_window->SetBackgroundColour(profileValues.BgCol);
555	}	557	}

Return to bug 143894

Lines 16-22 Link Here

(-)mahogany-0.67/configure (-15 / +37 lines)
16	ac_help="$ac_help	16	ac_help="$ac_help
17	--disable-optimize disable optimization (automatic if debugging)"	17	--disable-optimize disable optimization (automatic if debugging)"
18	ac_help="$ac_help	18	ac_help="$ac_help
19	--with-wxdebug use debug wxWindows libraries"	19	--with-wxdebug use debug wxWidgets libraries"
20	ac_help="$ac_help	20	ac_help="$ac_help
21	--with-dmalloc use dmalloc (http://dmalloc.com/) for debugging"	21	--with-dmalloc use dmalloc (http://dmalloc.com/) for debugging"
22	ac_help="$ac_help	22	ac_help="$ac_help
Lines 568-574 Link Here
568	fi	568	fi
569		569
570		570
571	# From configure.in Id: configure.in,v 1.316 2006/05/03 20:16:04 vadz Exp	571	# From configure.in Id: configure.in,v 1.318 2006/08/25 15:39:12 vadz Exp
572		572
573	rm -f conftestdata	573	rm -f conftestdata
574	if ln -s X conftestdata 2>/dev/null	574	if ln -s X conftestdata 2>/dev/null
Lines 2143-2156 Link Here
2143	if test -f /etc/redhat-release -a ! grep "7\.0" /etc/redhat-release	2143	if test -f /etc/redhat-release -a ! grep "7\.0" /etc/redhat-release
2144	then workarroundmsg="	2144	then workarroundmsg="
2145	It seems you are using Red Hat Linux 7.0. A workaround for your	2145	It seems you are using Red Hat Linux 7.0. A workaround for your
2146	problem is to use egcs to compile wxWindows and Mahogany:	2146	problem is to use egcs to compile wxWidgets and Mahogany:
2147	- at your bash prompt type:	2147	- at your bash prompt type:
2148	export CC=egcs	2148	export CC=egcs
2149	export CXX=egcs++	2149	export CXX=egcs++
2150	- reconfigure and rebuild wxWindows and Mahogany	2150	- reconfigure and rebuild wxWidgets and Mahogany
2151	(don't forget to remove the config.cache files	2151	(don't forget to remove the config.cache files
2152	located in the source code directories of	2152	located in the source code directories of
2153	wxWindows and Mahogany before reconfiguring them."	2153	wxWidgets and Mahogany before reconfiguring them."
2154	else workarroundmsg=""	2154	else workarroundmsg=""
2155	fi	2155	fi
2156	{ echo "configure: error: Sorry, it seems that you have a buggy gcc version which is	2156	{ echo "configure: error: Sorry, it seems that you have a buggy gcc version which is
Lines 4481-4493 Link Here
4481		4481
4482	if test "$wxOK" != 1; then	4482	if test "$wxOK" != 1; then
4483	{ echo "configure: error:	4483	{ echo "configure: error:
4484	Mahogany requires wxWindows to be installed on your system	4484	Mahogany requires wxWidgets to be installed on your system
4485	but wx-config script couldn't be found.	4485	but wx-config script couldn't be found.
4486		4486
4487	Please check that wx-config is in PATH, the directory	4487	Please check that wx-config is in PATH, the directory
4488	where wxWindows libraries are installed (returned by	4488	where wxWidgets libraries are installed (returned by
4489	'wx-config --libs' command) is in LD_LIBRARY_PATH or	4489	'wx-config --libs' command) is in LD_LIBRARY_PATH or
4490	equivalent variable and wxWindows version is 2.5.2 or above.	4490	equivalent variable and wxWidgets version is 2.5.2 or above.
4491	" 1>&2; exit 1; }	4491	" 1>&2; exit 1; }
4492	fi	4492	fi
4493		4493
Lines 4559-4566 Link Here
4559	fi	4559	fi
4560		4560
4561	case "$USE_THREADS" in 1)	4561	case "$USE_THREADS" in 1)
4562	echo $ac_n "checking if wxWindows was compiled with threads""... $ac_c" 1>&6	4562	echo $ac_n "checking if wxWidgets was compiled with threads""... $ac_c" 1>&6
4563	echo "configure:4564: checking if wxWindows was compiled with threads" >&5	4563	echo "configure:4564: checking if wxWidgets was compiled with threads" >&5
4564	if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'m_cv_wx_threads'+set}'`\" = set"; then	4564	if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'m_cv_wx_threads'+set}'`\" = set"; then
4565	echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6	4565	echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6
4566	else	4566	else
Lines 5324-5331 Link Here
5324		5324
5325	IMAP_CFLAGS="$CFLAGS"	5325	IMAP_CFLAGS="$CFLAGS"
5326	IMAP_CPPFLAGS="$IMAP_CPPFLAGS $CPPFLAGS"	5326	IMAP_CPPFLAGS="$IMAP_CPPFLAGS $CPPFLAGS"
5327	if test "$GCC" = "yes"; then	5327	echo $ac_n "checking whether $CC accepts -Wno-pointer-sign""... $ac_c" 1>&6
5328	IMAP_CPPFLAGS="$IMAP_CPPFLAGS -Wno-pointer-sign"	5328	echo "configure:5329: checking whether $CC accepts -Wno-pointer-sign" >&5
		5329	if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'m_cv_cc_no_warn_ptr_sign'+set}'`\" = set"; then
		5330	echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6
		5331	else
		5332
		5333
		5334	if test "x$GCC" = "xyes"; then
		5335	echo 'void f(){}' >conftest.c
		5336	case "`$CC -Wno-pointer-sign -c conftest.c 2>&1`" in
		5337	'') m_cv_cc_no_warn_ptr_sign="yes" ;;
		5338	*) m_cv_cc_no_warn_ptr_sign="no" ;;
		5339	esac
		5340	rm -f conftest.*
		5341	else
		5342	m_cv_cc_no_warn_ptr_sign="no"
		5343	fi
		5344
		5345
		5346	fi
		5347
		5348	echo "$ac_t""$m_cv_cc_no_warn_ptr_sign" 1>&6
		5349	if test $m_cv_cc_no_warn_ptr_sign = "yes"; then
		5350	IMAP_CPPFLAGS="$IMAP_CPPFLAGS -Wno-pointer-sign"
5329	fi	5351	fi
5330		5352
5331		5353
Lines 5380-5386 Link Here
5380	if test "x$DEPFLAGS" != "x"; then	5402	if test "x$DEPFLAGS" != "x"; then
5381	if test "x$GXX" != "xyes"; then	5403	if test "x$GXX" != "xyes"; then
5382	echo $ac_n "checking whether ${CXX} accepts ${DEPFLAGS}""... $ac_c" 1>&6	5404	echo $ac_n "checking whether ${CXX} accepts ${DEPFLAGS}""... $ac_c" 1>&6
5383	echo "configure:5384: checking whether ${CXX} accepts ${DEPFLAGS}" >&5	5405	echo "configure:5406: checking whether ${CXX} accepts ${DEPFLAGS}" >&5
5384	if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'m_cv_cxx_depflags'+set}'`\" = set"; then	5406	if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'m_cv_cxx_depflags'+set}'`\" = set"; then
5385	echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6	5407	echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6
5386	else	5408	else
Lines 5403-5409 Link Here
5403	if test "x$DEPFLAGS" != "x"; then	5425	if test "x$DEPFLAGS" != "x"; then
5404	if test "x$GCC" != "xyes"; then	5426	if test "x$GCC" != "xyes"; then
5405	echo $ac_n "checking whether ${CC} accepts ${DEPFLAGS}""... $ac_c" 1>&6	5427	echo $ac_n "checking whether ${CC} accepts ${DEPFLAGS}""... $ac_c" 1>&6
5406	echo "configure:5407: checking whether ${CC} accepts ${DEPFLAGS}" >&5	5428	echo "configure:5429: checking whether ${CC} accepts ${DEPFLAGS}" >&5
5407	if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'m_cv_c_depflags'+set}'`\" = set"; then	5429	if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'m_cv_c_depflags'+set}'`\" = set"; then
5408	echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6	5430	echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6
5409	else	5431	else
Lines 5958-5964 Link Here
5958	echo	5980	echo
5959	echo "Configured Mahogany ${M_VERSION_MAJOR}.${M_VERSION_MINOR}.${M_VERSION_RELEASE} for ${host}."	5981	echo "Configured Mahogany ${M_VERSION_MAJOR}.${M_VERSION_MINOR}.${M_VERSION_RELEASE} for ${host}."
5960	echo ""	5982	echo ""
5961	echo " wxWindows port used: ${WX_NAME} ${WX_VERSION}"	5983	echo " wxWidgets port used: ${WX_NAME} ${WX_VERSION}"
5962	echo " Debug mode: ${debug_option}"	5984	echo " Debug mode: ${debug_option}"
5963	echo " SSL support: ${ssl_option}"	5985	echo " SSL support: ${ssl_option}"
5964	echo " Modules support: ${m_cv_USE_MODULES}"	5986	echo " Modules support: ${m_cv_USE_MODULES}"

Lines 6-12 Link Here

(-)mahogany-0.67/src/gui/wxBrowseButton.cpp (-32 / +3 lines)
6	// Author: Vadim Zeitlin	6	// Author: Vadim Zeitlin
7	// Modified by:	7	// Modified by:
8	// Created: 24.12.98	8	// Created: 24.12.98
9	// CVS-ID: $Id: wxBrowseButton.cpp,v 1.43 2006/04/09 20:36:54 vadz Exp $	9	// CVS-ID: $Id: wxBrowseButton.cpp,v 1.44 2006/08/31 23:18:28 vadz Exp $
10	// Copyright: (c) 1998 Vadim Zeitlin <zeitlin@dptmaths.ens-cachan.fr>	10	// Copyright: (c) 1998 Vadim Zeitlin <zeitlin@dptmaths.ens-cachan.fr>
11	///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////	11	///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
12		12
Lines 384-418 Link Here
384	{	384	{
385	}	385	}
386		386
387	// FIXME: these methods rely on internals of wxNativeFontInfo because they
388	// know that it prepends the format version number (currently 0) to
389	// the real font desc string - they shouldn't but we should add methods
390	// to wxNativeFontInfo to do this conversion instead!
391
392	String wxFontBrowseButton::FontDescToUser(const String& desc)
393	{
394	String user = desc;
395	if ( user.length() > 2 && user[0u] == '0' && user[1u] == ';' )
396	{
397	user.erase(0, 2);
398	}
399
400	return user;
401	}
402
403	String wxFontBrowseButton::FontDescFromUser(const String& user)
404	{
405	String desc;
406	if ( !user.empty() )
407	{
408	desc = _T("0;");
409	}
410
411	desc += user;
412
413	return desc;
414	}
415
416	void wxFontBrowseButton::DoBrowse()	387	void wxFontBrowseButton::DoBrowse()
417	{	388	{
418	wxFont font;	389	wxFont font;
Lines 420-426 Link Here
420	wxString desc = GetText();	391	wxString desc = GetText();
421	if ( !desc.empty() )	392	if ( !desc.empty() )
422	{	393	{
423	if ( fontInfo.FromString(FontDescFromUser(desc)) )	394	if ( fontInfo.FromString(desc) )
424	{	395	{
425	font.SetNativeFontInfo(fontInfo);	396	font.SetNativeFontInfo(fontInfo);
426	}	397	}
Lines 434-440 Link Here
434	{	405	{
435	font = dialog.GetFontData().GetChosenFont();	406	font = dialog.GetFontData().GetChosenFont();
436		407
437	SetText(FontDescToUser(font.GetNativeFontInfoDesc()));	408	SetText(font.GetNativeFontInfoDesc());
438	}	409	}
439	}	410	}
440		411

Lines 5-11 Link Here

(-)mahogany-0.67/src/gui/wxFolderView.cpp (-31 / +13 lines)
5	// Author: Karsten Ballüder (Ballueder@gmx.net)	5	// Author: Karsten Ballüder (Ballueder@gmx.net)
6	// Modified by: VZ at 13.07.01: use virtual list control, update on demand	6	// Modified by: VZ at 13.07.01: use virtual list control, update on demand
7	// Created: 1997	7	// Created: 1997
8	// CVS-ID: $Id: wxFolderView.cpp,v 1.679 2006/06/30 11:08:18 nerijus Exp $	8	// CVS-ID: $Id: wxFolderView.cpp,v 1.683 2006/08/19 13:12:00 vadz Exp $
9	// Copyright: (c) 1997-2001 Mahogany team	9	// Copyright: (c) 1997-2001 Mahogany team
10	// Licence: M license	10	// Licence: M license
11	///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////	11	///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
Lines 1608-1631 Link Here
1608	SetTextColour( fg );	1608	SetTextColour( fg );
1609	SetBackgroundColour( bg );	1609	SetBackgroundColour( bg );
1610		1610
1611	wxFont font;	1611	wxFont font(CreateFontFromDesc(fontDesc, fontSize, fontFamily));
1612	if ( !fontDesc.empty() )	1612	if ( font.Ok() )
1613	{	1613	{
1614	wxNativeFontInfo fontInfo;	1614	SetFont(font);
1615	if ( fontInfo.FromString(fontDesc) )
1616	{
1617	font.SetNativeFontInfo(fontInfo);
1618	}
1619	}
1620
1621	if ( !font.Ok() )
1622	{
1623	font = wxFont(fontSize, fontFamily,
1624	wxFONTSTYLE_NORMAL, wxFONTWEIGHT_NORMAL);
1625	}	1615	}
1626		1616
1627	SetFont(font);
1628
1629	if ( memcmp(m_columns, columns, sizeof(m_columns)) != 0 )	1617	if ( memcmp(m_columns, columns, sizeof(m_columns)) != 0 )
1630	{	1618	{
1631	// the control must be recreated if the order of columns changed	1619	// the control must be recreated if the order of columns changed
Lines 4626-4651 Link Here
4626	}	4614	}
4627	break;	4615	break;
4628		4616
4629	case WXK_UP:
4630	case WXK_DOWN:
4631	case WXK_HOME:
4632	case WXK_END:
4633	case WXK_RETURN:
4634	#if !defined DEBUG_nerijus
4635	case WXK_SPACE:
4636	#endif
4637	// let the control process these keys as they're used for navigation
4638	event.Skip();
4639	return false;
4640
4641	default:	4617	default:
4642	// pressing any alphanumeric character in the list control starts	4618	// pressing any alphanumeric character in the list control starts
4643	// incremental search in it which is worse than useless in our case	4619	// incremental search in it which is worse than useless in our case
4644	// because it's never going to find anything (the first column is	4620	// because it's never going to find anything (the first column is
4645	// always flags in this case and won't match...) and we just lost the	4621	// always flags in this case and won't match...) and we just lose the
4646	// current selection, so prevent this from happening by not calling	4622	// current selection, so prevent this from happening by not calling
4647	// event.Skip() here	4623	// event.Skip() in this case
4648	;	4624	if ( key >= 0x7f \|\| !isalnum(key) )
		4625	{
		4626	// let the control process other keys (some are used for navigation
		4627	// in it)
		4628	event.Skip();
		4629	return false;
		4630	}
4649	}	4631	}
4650		4632
4651	if ( cmd )	4633	if ( cmd )

Lines 1-4 Link Here

(-)mahogany-0.67/acinclude.m4 (-259 / +15 lines)
1	dnl $Id: acinclude.m4,v 1.9 2004/10/10 23:55:35 vadz Exp $	1	dnl $Id: acinclude.m4,v 1.11 2006/08/25 15:38:28 vadz Exp $
2	dnl local macro definitions for M's configure.in	2	dnl local macro definitions for M's configure.in
3		3
4	dnl package,message,variable,default,helpmessage	4	dnl package,message,variable,default,helpmessage
Lines 170-432 Link Here
170	]	170	]
171	)	171	)
172		172
173		173	dnl M_GCC_OPTION(OPTION, ACTION-IF-SUPPORTED, ACTION-IF-NOT-SUPPORTED)
174	## libtool.m4 - Configure libtool for the target system. --Shell-script--
175	## Copyright (C) 1996-1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
176	## Gordon Matzigkeit <gord@gnu.ai.mit.edu>, 1996
177	##
178	## This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
179	## it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
180	## the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
181	## (at your option) any later version.
182	##
183	## This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
184	## WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
185	## MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
186	## General Public License for more details.
187	##
188	## You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
189	## along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
190	## Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
191	##
192	## As a special exception to the GNU General Public License, if you
193	## distribute this file as part of a program that contains a
194	## configuration script generated by Autoconf, you may include it under
195	## the same distribution terms that you use for the rest of that program.
196
197	# serial 24 AM_PROG_LIBTOOL
198	AC_DEFUN([AM_PROG_LIBTOOL],
199	[AC_REQUIRE([AM_ENABLE_SHARED])dnl
200	AC_REQUIRE([AM_ENABLE_STATIC])dnl
201	AC_REQUIRE([AC_CANONICAL_HOST])dnl
202	AC_REQUIRE([AC_PROG_RANLIB])dnl
203	AC_REQUIRE([AC_PROG_CC])dnl
204	AC_REQUIRE([AM_PROG_LD])dnl
205	AC_REQUIRE([AM_PROG_NM])dnl
206	AC_REQUIRE([AC_PROG_LN_S])dnl
207	dnl	174	dnl
208	# Always use our own libtool.	175	dnl Check if gcc supports the given option (fails if compiler is not gcc)
209	LIBTOOL='$(SHELL) $(top_builddir)/libtool'	176	AC_DEFUN([M_GCC_OPTION], [
210	AC_SUBST(LIBTOOL)dnl	177	AC_REQUIRE([AC_PROG_CC])
211		178	if test "x$GCC" = "xyes"; then
212	# Check for any special flags to pass to ltconfig.	179	echo 'void f(){}' >conftest.c
213	libtool_flags=	180	case "`$CC $1 -c conftest.c 2>&1`" in
214	test "$enable_shared" = no && libtool_flags="$libtool_flags --disable-shared"	181	'') ifelse([$2], , :, [$2]) ;;
215	test "$enable_static" = no && libtool_flags="$libtool_flags --disable-static"	182	*) ifelse([$3], , :, [$3]) ;;
216	test "$silent" = yes && libtool_flags="$libtool_flags --silent"	183	esac
217	test "$ac_cv_prog_gcc" = yes && libtool_flags="$libtool_flags --with-gcc"	184	rm -f conftest.*
218	test "$ac_cv_prog_gnu_ld" = yes && libtool_flags="$libtool_flags --with-gnu-ld"	185	else
219		186	ifelse([$3], , :, [$3])
220	# Some flags need to be propagated to the compiler or linker for good	187	fi
221	# libtool support.
222	case "$host" in
223	--irix6*)
224	# Find out which ABI we are using.
225	echo '[#]line __oline__ "configure"' > conftest.$ac_ext
226	if AC_TRY_EVAL(ac_compile); then
227	case "`/usr/bin/file conftest.o`" in
228	32-bit)
229	LD="${LD-ld} -32"
230	;;
231	N32)
232	LD="${LD-ld} -n32"
233	;;
234	64-bit)
235	LD="${LD-ld} -64"
236	;;
237	esac
238	fi
239	rm -rf conftest*
240	;;
241
242	--sco3.2v5*)
243	# On SCO OpenServer 5, we need -belf to get full-featured binaries.
244	CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -belf"
245	;;
246	esac
247
248	# Actually configure libtool. ac_aux_dir is where install-sh is found.
249	CC="$CC" CFLAGS="$CFLAGS" CPPFLAGS="$CPPFLAGS" \
250	LD="$LD" NM="$NM" RANLIB="$RANLIB" LN_S="$LN_S" \
251	${CONFIG_SHELL-/bin/sh} $ac_aux_dir/ltconfig \
252	$libtool_flags --no-verify $ac_aux_dir/ltmain.sh $host \
253	\|\| AC_MSG_ERROR([libtool configure failed])
254	])
255
256	# AM_ENABLE_SHARED - implement the --enable-shared flag
257	# Usage: AM_ENABLE_SHARED[(DEFAULT)]
258	# Where DEFAULT is either `yes' or `no'. If omitted, it defaults to
259	# `yes'.
260	AC_DEFUN([AM_ENABLE_SHARED],
261	[define([AM_ENABLE_SHARED_DEFAULT], ifelse($1, no, no, yes))dnl
262	AC_ARG_ENABLE(shared,
263	changequote(<<, >>)dnl
264	<< --enable-shared build shared libraries [default=>>AM_ENABLE_SHARED_DEFAULT]
265	changequote([, ])dnl
266	[ --enable-shared=PKGS only build shared libraries if the current package
267	appears as an element in the PKGS list],
268	[p=${PACKAGE-default}
269	case "$enableval" in
270	yes) enable_shared=yes ;;
271	no) enable_shared=no ;;
272	*)
273	enable_shared=no
274	# Look at the argument we got. We use all the common list separators.
275	IFS="${IFS= }"; ac_save_ifs="$IFS"; IFS="${IFS}:,"
276	for pkg in $enableval; do
277	if test "X$pkg" = "X$p"; then
278	enable_shared=yes
279	fi
280	done
281	IFS="$ac_save_ifs"
282	;;
283	esac],
284	enable_shared=AM_ENABLE_SHARED_DEFAULT)dnl
285	])
286
287	# AM_DISABLE_SHARED - set the default shared flag to --disable-shared
288	AC_DEFUN([AM_DISABLE_SHARED],
289	[AM_ENABLE_SHARED(no)])
290
291	# AM_DISABLE_STATIC - set the default static flag to --disable-static
292	AC_DEFUN([AM_DISABLE_STATIC],
293	[AM_ENABLE_STATIC(no)])
294
295	# AM_ENABLE_STATIC - implement the --enable-static flag
296	# Usage: AM_ENABLE_STATIC[(DEFAULT)]
297	# Where DEFAULT is either `yes' or `no'. If omitted, it defaults to
298	# `yes'.
299	AC_DEFUN([AM_ENABLE_STATIC],
300	[define([AM_ENABLE_STATIC_DEFAULT], ifelse($1, no, no, yes))dnl
301	AC_ARG_ENABLE(static,
302	changequote(<<, >>)dnl
303	<< --enable-static build static libraries [default=>>AM_ENABLE_STATIC_DEFAULT]
304	changequote([, ])dnl
305	[ --enable-static=PKGS only build shared libraries if the current package
306	appears as an element in the PKGS list],
307	[p=${PACKAGE-default}
308	case "$enableval" in
309	yes) enable_static=yes ;;
310	no) enable_static=no ;;
311	*)
312	enable_static=no
313	# Look at the argument we got. We use all the common list separators.
314	IFS="${IFS= }"; ac_save_ifs="$IFS"; IFS="${IFS}:,"
315	for pkg in $enableval; do
316	if test "X$pkg" = "X$p"; then
317	enable_static=yes
318	fi
319	done
320	IFS="$ac_save_ifs"
321	;;
322	esac],
323	enable_static=AM_ENABLE_STATIC_DEFAULT)dnl
324	])
325
326
327	# AM_PROG_LD - find the path to the GNU or non-GNU linker
328	AC_DEFUN([AM_PROG_LD],
329	[AC_ARG_WITH(gnu-ld,
330	[ --with-gnu-ld assume the C compiler uses GNU ld [default=no]],
331	test "$withval" = no \|\| with_gnu_ld=yes, with_gnu_ld=no)
332	AC_REQUIRE([AC_PROG_CC])
333	ac_prog=ld
334	if test "$ac_cv_prog_gcc" = yes; then
335	# Check if gcc -print-prog-name=ld gives a path.
336	AC_MSG_CHECKING([for ld used by GCC])
337	ac_prog=`($CC -print-prog-name=ld) 2>&5`
338	case "$ac_prog" in
339	# Accept absolute paths.
340	/* \| [A-Za-z]:\\*)
341	test -z "$LD" && LD="$ac_prog"
342	;;
343	"")
344	# If it fails, then pretend we aren't using GCC.
345	ac_prog=ld
346	;;
347	*)
348	# If it is relative, then search for the first ld in PATH.
349	with_gnu_ld=unknown
350	;;
351	esac
352	elif test "$with_gnu_ld" = yes; then
353	AC_MSG_CHECKING([for GNU ld])
354	else
355	AC_MSG_CHECKING([for non-GNU ld])
356	fi
357	AC_CACHE_VAL(ac_cv_path_LD,
358	[if test -z "$LD"; then
359	IFS="${IFS= }"; ac_save_ifs="$IFS"; IFS="${IFS}:"
360	for ac_dir in $PATH; do
361	test -z "$ac_dir" && ac_dir=.
362	if test -f "$ac_dir/$ac_prog"; then
363	ac_cv_path_LD="$ac_dir/$ac_prog"
364	# Check to see if the program is GNU ld. I'd rather use --version,
365	# but apparently some GNU ld's only accept -v.
366	# Break only if it was the GNU/non-GNU ld that we prefer.
367	if "$ac_cv_path_LD" -v 2>&1 < /dev/null \| egrep '(GNU\|with BFD)' > /dev/null; then
368	test "$with_gnu_ld" != no && break
369	else
370	test "$with_gnu_ld" != yes && break
371	fi
372	fi
373	done
374	IFS="$ac_save_ifs"
375	else
376	ac_cv_path_LD="$LD" # Let the user override the test with a path.
377	fi])
378	LD="$ac_cv_path_LD"
379	if test -n "$LD"; then
380	AC_MSG_RESULT($LD)
381	else
382	AC_MSG_RESULT(no)
383	fi
384	test -z "$LD" && AC_MSG_ERROR([no acceptable ld found in \$PATH])
385	AC_SUBST(LD)
386	AM_PROG_LD_GNU
387	])
388
389	AC_DEFUN([AM_PROG_LD_GNU],
390	[AC_CACHE_CHECK([if the linker ($LD) is GNU ld], ac_cv_prog_gnu_ld,
391	[# I'd rather use --version here, but apparently some GNU ld's only accept -v.
392	if $LD -v 2>&1 </dev/null \| egrep '(GNU\|with BFD)' 1>&5; then
393	ac_cv_prog_gnu_ld=yes
394	else
395	ac_cv_prog_gnu_ld=no
396	fi])
397	])
398
399	# AM_PROG_NM - find the path to a BSD-compatible name lister
400	AC_DEFUN([AM_PROG_NM],
401	[AC_MSG_CHECKING([for BSD-compatible nm])
402	AC_CACHE_VAL(ac_cv_path_NM,
403	[case "$NM" in
404	/* \| [A-Za-z]:\\*)
405	ac_cv_path_NM="$NM" # Let the user override the test with a path.
406	;;
407	*)
408	IFS="${IFS= }"; ac_save_ifs="$IFS"; IFS="${IFS}:"
409	for ac_dir in /usr/ucb /usr/ccs/bin $PATH /bin; do
410	test -z "$ac_dir" && ac_dir=.
411	if test -f $ac_dir/nm; then
412	# Check to see if the nm accepts a BSD-compat flag.
413	# Adding the `sed 1q' prevents false positives on HP-UX, which says:
414	# nm: unknown option "B" ignored
415	if ($ac_dir/nm -B /dev/null 2>&1 \| sed '1q'; exit 0) \| egrep /dev/null >/dev/null; then
416	ac_cv_path_NM="$ac_dir/nm -B"
417	elif ($ac_dir/nm -p /dev/null 2>&1 \| sed '1q'; exit 0) \| egrep /dev/null >/dev/null; then
418	ac_cv_path_NM="$ac_dir/nm -p"
419	else
420	ac_cv_path_NM="$ac_dir/nm"
421	fi
422	break
423	fi
424	done
425	IFS="$ac_save_ifs"
426	test -z "$ac_cv_path_NM" && ac_cv_path_NM=nm
427	;;
428	esac])
429	NM="$ac_cv_path_NM"
430	AC_MSG_RESULT([$NM])
431	AC_SUBST(NM)
432	])	188	])

Lines 1-7 Link Here

(-)mahogany-0.67/configure.in (-4 / +10 lines)
1	dnl Process this file with autoconf to produce a configure script.	1	dnl Process this file with autoconf to produce a configure script.
2		2
3	AC_INIT(configure.in)	3	AC_INIT(configure.in)
4	AC_REVISION([$Id: configure.in,v 1.317 2006/07/31 00:32:44 nerijus Exp $])	4	AC_REVISION([$Id: configure.in,v 1.319 2006/08/31 23:58:25 vadz Exp $])
5		5
6	rm -f conftestdata	6	rm -f conftestdata
7	if ln -s X conftestdata 2>/dev/null	7	if ln -s X conftestdata 2>/dev/null
Lines 1293-1301 Link Here
1293	dnl imap	1293	dnl imap
1294	IMAP_CFLAGS="$CFLAGS"	1294	IMAP_CFLAGS="$CFLAGS"
1295	IMAP_CPPFLAGS="$IMAP_CPPFLAGS $CPPFLAGS"	1295	IMAP_CPPFLAGS="$IMAP_CPPFLAGS $CPPFLAGS"
1296	if test "$GCC" = "yes"; then	1296	dnl there are too many warnings in c-client sources which its author
1297	dnl there are too many warnings in c-client sources which its author	1297	dnl refuses to fix, suppress them when using gcc4
1298	dnl refuses to fix, suppress them when using gcc	1298	AC_CACHE_CHECK([whether $CC accepts -Wno-pointer-sign],
		1299	m_cv_cc_no_warn_ptr_sign,
		1300	[M_GCC_OPTION(-Wno-pointer-sign,
		1301	m_cv_cc_no_warn_ptr_sign="yes",
		1302	m_cv_cc_no_warn_ptr_sign="no")]
		1303	)
		1304	if test $m_cv_cc_no_warn_ptr_sign = "yes"; then
1299	IMAP_CPPFLAGS="$IMAP_CPPFLAGS -Wno-pointer-sign"	1305	IMAP_CPPFLAGS="$IMAP_CPPFLAGS -Wno-pointer-sign"
1300	fi	1306	fi
1301	AC_SUBST(IMAP_CPPFLAGS)	1307	AC_SUBST(IMAP_CPPFLAGS)

Lines 6-12 Link Here

(-)mahogany-0.67/include/gui/wxBrowseButton.h (-6 / +1 lines)
6	// Author: Vadim Zeitlin	6	// Author: Vadim Zeitlin
7	// Modified by:	7	// Modified by:
8	// Created: 24.12.98	8	// Created: 24.12.98
9	// CVS-ID: $Id: wxBrowseButton.h,v 1.26 2006/01/16 20:32:01 nerijus Exp $	9	// CVS-ID: $Id: wxBrowseButton.h,v 1.27 2006/08/31 23:18:29 vadz Exp $
10	// Copyright: (c) 1998 Vadim Zeitlin <zeitlin@dptmaths.ens-cachan.fr>	10	// Copyright: (c) 1998 Vadim Zeitlin <zeitlin@dptmaths.ens-cachan.fr>
11	// Licence: M license	11	// Licence: M license
12	///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////	12	///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
Lines 293-303 Link Here
293	// show the font selection dialog	293	// show the font selection dialog
294	virtual void DoBrowse();	294	virtual void DoBrowse();
295		295
296	// convert between wxNativeFontInfo description and the string we show to
297	// the user in the text control
298	static String FontDescToUser(const String& desc);
299	static String FontDescFromUser(const String& desc);
300
301	private:	296	private:
302	DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxFontBrowseButton)	297	DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxFontBrowseButton)
303	};	298	};

Lines 5-11 Link Here

(-)mahogany-0.67/include/Mdefaults.h (-9 / +1 lines)
5	// Author: Karsten Ballüder	5	// Author: Karsten Ballüder
6	// Modified by: Vadim Zeitlin at 22.08.01 to use MOption class	6	// Modified by: Vadim Zeitlin at 22.08.01 to use MOption class
7	// Created: 1997	7	// Created: 1997
8	// CVS-ID: $Id: Mdefaults.h,v 1.259 2005/05/15 21:16:50 vadz Exp $	8	// CVS-ID: $Id: Mdefaults.h,v 1.260 2006/08/19 13:11:59 vadz Exp $
9	// Copyright: (c) 1997-2001 Mahogany team	9	// Copyright: (c) 1997-2001 Mahogany team
10	// Licence: M licence	10	// Licence: M licence
11	///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////	11	///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
Lines 15-28 Link Here
15		15
16	class Profile;	16	class Profile;
17		17
18	// under Windows 12pt font looks too huge, letters are like in a book for
19	// children
20	#ifdef OS_WIN
21	# define DEFAULT_FONT_SIZE 10l
22	#else
23	# define DEFAULT_FONT_SIZE 12l
24	#endif
25
26	/** @name Levels of interaction, do something or not?	18	/** @name Levels of interaction, do something or not?
27		19
28	NB: these values can't be changed as they are written to (and read from)	20	NB: these values can't be changed as they are written to (and read from)

Lines 7-13 Link Here

(-)mahogany-0.67/include/Moptions.h (-7 / +7 lines)
7	// Author: Vadim Zeitlin	7	// Author: Vadim Zeitlin
8	// Modified by:	8	// Modified by:
9	// Created: 23.08.01	9	// Created: 23.08.01
10	// CVS-ID: $Id: Moptions.h,v 1.105 2006/06/23 23:27:30 vadz Exp $	10	// CVS-ID: $Id: Moptions.h,v 1.106 2006/08/19 13:11:59 vadz Exp $
11	// Copyright: (c) 2001 Vadim Zeitlin	11	// Copyright: (c) 2001 Vadim Zeitlin
12	// Licence: M licence	12	// Licence: M licence
13	///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////	13	///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
Lines 1906-1914 Link Here
1906	/// message view title	1906	/// message view title
1907	#define MP_MVIEW_TITLE_FMT_DEFVAL _("from $from about \"$subject\"")	1907	#define MP_MVIEW_TITLE_FMT_DEFVAL _("from $from about \"$subject\"")
1908	/// which font to use	1908	/// which font to use
1909	#define MP_MVIEW_FONT_DEFVAL 6L	1909	#define MP_MVIEW_FONT_DEFVAL 0L
1910	/// which font size	1910	/// which font size
1911	#define MP_MVIEW_FONT_SIZE_DEFVAL DEFAULT_FONT_SIZE	1911	#define MP_MVIEW_FONT_SIZE_DEFVAL -1
1912	/// the full font desc (replaces the 2 settings above)	1912	/// the full font desc (replaces the 2 settings above)
1913	#define MP_MVIEW_FONT_DESC_DEFVAL wxEmptyString	1913	#define MP_MVIEW_FONT_DESC_DEFVAL wxEmptyString
1914	/// which foreground colour for the font	1914	/// which foreground colour for the font
Lines 1944-1952 Link Here
1944	/*@name Font settings for message view /	1944	/*@name Font settings for message view /
1945	//@{	1945	//@{
1946	/// which font to use	1946	/// which font to use
1947	#define MP_FVIEW_FONT_DEFVAL 4L	1947	#define MP_FVIEW_FONT_DEFVAL 0L
1948	/// which font size	1948	/// which font size
1949	#define MP_FVIEW_FONT_SIZE_DEFVAL DEFAULT_FONT_SIZE	1949	#define MP_FVIEW_FONT_SIZE_DEFVAL -1
1950	/// the full font desc (replaces the 2 settings above)	1950	/// the full font desc (replaces the 2 settings above)
1951	#define MP_FVIEW_FONT_DESC_DEFVAL wxEmptyString	1951	#define MP_FVIEW_FONT_DESC_DEFVAL wxEmptyString
1952	/// don't show full e-mail, only sender's name	1952	/// don't show full e-mail, only sender's name
Lines 2007-2015 Link Here
2007	/*@name Font settings for compose view /	2007	/*@name Font settings for compose view /
2008	//@{	2008	//@{
2009	/// which font to use	2009	/// which font to use
2010	#define MP_CVIEW_FONT_DEFVAL 6L	2010	#define MP_CVIEW_FONT_DEFVAL 0L
2011	/// which font size	2011	/// which font size
2012	#define MP_CVIEW_FONT_SIZE_DEFVAL DEFAULT_FONT_SIZE	2012	#define MP_CVIEW_FONT_SIZE_DEFVAL -1
2013	/// the full font desc (replaces the 2 settings above)	2013	/// the full font desc (replaces the 2 settings above)
2014	#define MP_CVIEW_FONT_DESC_DEFVAL wxEmptyString	2014	#define MP_CVIEW_FONT_DESC_DEFVAL wxEmptyString
2015	/// which foreground colour for the font	2015	/// which foreground colour for the font

Lines 1-18 Link Here

(-)mahogany-0.67/include/sysutil.h (-30 / +53 lines)
1	/-- c++ --*******************************************************	1	///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
2	* sysutil.h : utility functions for various OS functionality *	2	// Project: M - cross platform e-mail GUI client
3	* *	3	// File name: include/sysutil.h
4	* (C) 1999 by Karsten Ballüder (Ballueder@usa.net) *	4	// Purpose: utility functions for various OS-level functionality
5	* *	5	// Author: Karsten Ballüder, Vadim Zeitlin
6	* $Id: sysutil.h,v 1.10 2003/09/18 16:30:43 robertvazan Exp $	6	// Created: 1999
7	*	7	// CVS-ID: $Id: sysutil.h,v 1.11 2006/08/31 23:45:05 vadz Exp $
8	*******************************************************************/	8	// Copyright: (c) 1999 Karsten Ballüder
		9	// (c) 2000-2006 Vadim Zeitlin <vadim@wxwindows.org>
		10	// Licence: M license
		11	///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
9		12
10		13	#ifndef M_SYSUTIL_H
11	#ifndef SYSUTIL_H	14	#define M_SYSUTIL_H
12	#define SYSUTIL_H
13
14	#ifndef USE_PCH
15	#endif // USE_PCH
16		15
17	#include <wx/filename.h>	16	#include <wx/filename.h>
18		17
Lines 38-64 Link Here
38	class MTempFileName	37	class MTempFileName
39	{	38	{
40	public:	39	public:
41	// def ctor: creates the temp file and doesn't delete it unless told to do	40	/**
42	// so (i.e. Ok() is called)	41	Ctor creates a temporary file name and possibly associates it with the
43	MTempFileName() : m_name (wxFileName::CreateTempFileName(_T("Mahogany")))	42	specified file.
44	{ m_ok = false; }	43
45		44	If the temp file name is used for writing some data to it, the file
46	// ctor which takes a temp file name: still won't be deleted unless Ok() is	45	parameter must be specified as otherwise the operation wouldn't be atomic
47	// called	46	and race conditions could occur. Do close the file before this object
48	MTempFileName(const String& name) : m_name(name) { m_ok = false; }	47	goes out of scope in this case though as otherwise we could fail to
		48	delete the temp file under Windows.
		49
		50	@param file if non-NULL, the file to open (for writing) with the
		51	temporary file name
		52	*/
		53	MTempFileName(wxFile *file = NULL)
		54	: m_name(wxFileName::CreateTempFileName(_T("Mahogany"), file))
		55	{
		56	m_keepFile = false;
		57	}
		58
		59	/**
		60	Ctor from an existing temporary file name.
49		61
50	/// returns FALSE if temp file name couldn't be generated	62	The specified file will be deleted when this object is destroyed unless
51	bool IsOk() const { return !!m_name; }	63	Ok() is called.
52		64
53	/// get the name of the temp file	65	@param name of the existing temporary file
		66	*/
		67	MTempFileName(const String& name) : m_name(name)
		68	{
		69	m_keepFile = false;
		70	}
		71
		72	/// Returns false if temp file name couldn't be generated
		73	bool IsOk() const { return !m_name.empty(); }
		74
		75	/// Get the name of the temp file
54	const String& GetName() const { return m_name; }	76	const String& GetName() const { return m_name; }
55		77
56	/// tells us not to delete the temp file	78	/// Tells us not to delete the temp file
57	void Ok() { m_ok = true; }	79	void Ok() { m_keepFile = true; }
58		80
59	~MTempFileName()	81	~MTempFileName()
60	{	82	{
61	if ( !m_ok && !m_name.empty() )	83	if ( !m_keepFile && !m_name.empty() )
62	{	84	{
63	if ( wxRemove(m_name) != 0 )	85	if ( wxRemove(m_name) != 0 )
64	{	86	{
Lines 69-77 Link Here
69		91
70	private:	92	private:
71	String m_name;	93	String m_name;
72	bool m_ok;	94	bool m_keepFile;
73	};	95	};
74		96
75	//@}	97	//@}
76	#endif	98
		99	#endif // M_SYSUTIL_H
77		100

Lines 8-14 Link Here

(-)mahogany-0.67/src/classes/MessageView.cpp (-27 / +8 lines)
8	// Author: Vadim Zeitlin (based on gui/MessageView.cpp by Karsten)	8	// Author: Vadim Zeitlin (based on gui/MessageView.cpp by Karsten)
9	// Modified by:	9	// Modified by:
10	// Created: 24.07.01	10	// Created: 24.07.01
11	// CVS-ID: $Id: MessageView.cpp,v 1.173 2006/07/24 14:13:41 vadz Exp $	11	// CVS-ID: $Id: MessageView.cpp,v 1.175 2006/08/23 15:41:53 vadz Exp $
12	// Copyright: (c) 2001 Mahogany Team	12	// Copyright: (c) 2001 Mahogany Team
13	// Licence: Mahogany license	13	// Licence: Mahogany license
14	///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////	14	///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
Lines 505-539 Link Here
505		505
506	wxFont MessageView::AllProfileValues::GetFont(wxFontEncoding encoding) const	506	wxFont MessageView::AllProfileValues::GetFont(wxFontEncoding encoding) const
507	{	507	{
508	wxFont font;	508	wxFont font(CreateFontFromDesc(fontDesc, fontSize, fontFamily));
509		509
510	if ( !fontDesc.empty() )	510	// assume that wxFONTENCODING_DEFAULT (US-ASCII) text can be shown in any
		511	// encoding
		512	if ( encoding != wxFONTENCODING_DEFAULT )
511	{	513	{
512	wxNativeFontInfo fontInfo;	514	if ( !font.Ok() )
513	if ( fontInfo.FromString(fontDesc) )	515	font = *wxNORMAL_FONT;
514	{
515	font.SetNativeFontInfo(fontInfo);
516		516
517	// assume that iso8859-1 text can be shown in any encoding - it's	517	font.SetEncoding(encoding);
518	// true for all normal fonts
519	if ( font.Ok() &&
520	(encoding != wxFONTENCODING_DEFAULT) &&
521	(encoding != wxFONTENCODING_ISO8859_1) )
522	{
523	font.SetEncoding(encoding);
524	}
525	}
526	}
527
528	if ( !font.Ok() )
529	{
530	font = wxFont(fontSize,
531	fontFamily,
532	wxFONTSTYLE_NORMAL,
533	wxFONTWEIGHT_NORMAL,
534	FALSE, // not underlined
535	wxEmptyString, // no specific face name
536	encoding);
537	}	518	}
538		519
539	return font;	520	return font;

Lines 3-9 Link Here

(-)mahogany-0.67/src/classes/MModule.cpp (-2 / +2 lines)
3	* *	3	* *
4	* (C) 1999 by Karsten Ballüder (karsten@phy.hw.ac.uk) *	4	* (C) 1999 by Karsten Ballüder (karsten@phy.hw.ac.uk) *
5	* *	5	* *
6	* $Id: MModule.cpp,v 1.97 2006/02/12 22:36:40 vadz Exp $	6	* $Id: MModule.cpp,v 1.98 2006/08/25 15:59:30 vadz Exp $
7	*******************************************************************/	7	*******************************************************************/
8		8
9	/*	9	/*
Lines 158-165 Link Here
158	wxDynamicLibrary *dll = module->GetDLL();	158	wxDynamicLibrary *dll = module->GetDLL();
159		159
160	// call cleanup function, if any	160	// call cleanup function, if any
		161	if ( dll->HasSymbol(MMODULE_CLEANUP_FUNCTION) )
161	{	162	{
162	wxLogNull noLog;
163	MModule_CleanUpFuncType funcCleanup =	163	MModule_CleanUpFuncType funcCleanup =
164	(MModule_CleanUpFuncType)dll->GetSymbol(MMODULE_CLEANUP_FUNCTION);	164	(MModule_CleanUpFuncType)dll->GetSymbol(MMODULE_CLEANUP_FUNCTION);
165	if ( funcCleanup )	165	if ( funcCleanup )

Lines 5-11 Link Here

(-)mahogany-0.67/src/gui/wxComposeView.cpp (-30 / +38 lines)
5	// Author: Karsten Ballüder, Vadim Zeitlin	5	// Author: Karsten Ballüder, Vadim Zeitlin
6	// Modified by:	6	// Modified by:
7	// Created: 1998	7	// Created: 1998
8	// CVS-ID: $Id: wxComposeView.cpp,v 1.413 2006/06/28 15:55:15 vadz Exp $	8	// CVS-ID: $Id: wxComposeView.cpp,v 1.418 2006/08/25 13:25:48 vadz Exp $
9	// Copyright: (c) 1998-2001 Mahogany team	9	// Copyright: (c) 1998-2001 Mahogany team
10	// Licence: M license	10	// Licence: M license
11	///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////	11	///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
Lines 924-948 Link Here
924		924
925	wxFont ComposerOptions::GetFont() const	925	wxFont ComposerOptions::GetFont() const
926	{	926	{
927	wxFont font;	927	return CreateFontFromDesc(m_font, m_fontSize, m_fontFamily);
928	if ( !m_font.empty() )
929	{
930	wxNativeFontInfo fontInfo;
931	if ( fontInfo.FromString(m_font) )
932	{
933	font.SetNativeFontInfo(fontInfo);
934	}
935	}
936
937	if ( !font.Ok() )
938	{
939	font = wxFont(m_fontSize,
940	m_fontFamily,
941	wxFONTSTYLE_NORMAL,
942	wxFONTWEIGHT_NORMAL);
943	}
944
945	return font;
946	}	928	}
947		929
948	// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------	930	// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Lines 2288-2294 Link Here
2288	{	2270	{
2289	text->SetForegroundColour(m_options.m_fg);	2271	text->SetForegroundColour(m_options.m_fg);
2290	text->SetBackgroundColour(m_options.m_bg);	2272	text->SetBackgroundColour(m_options.m_bg);
2291	text->SetFont(m_options.GetFont());	2273	wxFont font(m_options.GetFont());
		2274	if ( font.Ok() )
		2275	text->SetFont(font);
2292		2276
2293	wxSizer *sizer = text->GetContainingSizer();	2277	wxSizer *sizer = text->GetContainingSizer();
2294	if ( sizer )	2278	if ( sizer )
Lines 3764-3771 Link Here
3764	// we have a handy function in wxFileType which will replace	3748	// we have a handy function in wxFileType which will replace
3765	// '%s' with the file name or add the file name at the end if	3749	// '%s' with the file name or add the file name at the end if
3766	// there is no '%s'	3750	// there is no '%s'
3767	wxFileType::MessageParameters params(tmpFileName.GetName(), wxEmptyString);	3751	String
3768	String command = wxFileType::ExpandCommand(extEdit, params);	3752	command = wxFileType::ExpandCommand(extEdit, tmpFileName.GetName());
3769		3753
3770	// do start the external process	3754	// do start the external process
3771	m_procExtEdit = new wxProcess(this, HelperProcess_Editor);	3755	m_procExtEdit = new wxProcess(this, HelperProcess_Editor);
Lines 4074-4085 Link Here
4074	}	4058	}
4075	else // non empty file	4059	else // non empty file
4076	{	4060	{
4077	wxChar *p = text.GetWriteBuf(lenFile + 1);	4061	wxStringBuffer buf(text, lenFile + 1);
4078	p[lenFile] = '\0';	4062	buf[lenFile] = '\0';
4079
4080	ok = file.Read(p, lenFile) != wxInvalidOffset;
4081		4063
4082	text.UngetWriteBuf();	4064	ok = file.Read(buf, lenFile) != wxInvalidOffset;
4083	}	4065	}
4084	}	4066	}
4085		4067
Lines 4095-4105 Link Here
4095	return true;	4077	return true;
4096	}	4078	}
4097		4079
4098	/// inserts a text
4099	void	4080	void
4100	wxComposeView::InsertText(const String &text)	4081	wxComposeView::InsertText(const String &text)
4101	{	4082	{
4102	m_editor->InsertText(text, MessageEditor::Insert_Append);	4083	// the text here may come from a file and so can be in an encoding different
		4084	// from the one we currently use, but we -- unfortunately -- have no way of
		4085	// knowing about it, except in the special case when we use UTF-8 and then
		4086	// we must check if text is a valid UTF-8 string as otherwise inserting it
		4087	// is going to fail
		4088	String textCopy;
		4089	if ( wxLocale::GetSystemEncoding() == wxFONTENCODING_UTF8 )
		4090	{
		4091	if ( wxConvUTF8.MB2WC(NULL, text, 0) == (size_t)-1 )
		4092	{
		4093	// not a valid UTF-8 string, must suppose it's in some other encoding
		4094	// and as we have no idea about what it is, choose latin1 as the most
		4095	// common (among Mahogany users, anyhow)
		4096	if ( m_encoding == wxFONTENCODING_SYSTEM )
		4097	{
		4098	// change the encoding to latin1 if none explicitly specified
		4099	SetEncoding(wxFONTENCODING_ISO8859_1);
		4100	}
		4101	else // we already have an existing encoding
		4102	{
		4103	// transform the text from latin1 to the current encoding
		4104	textCopy = wxCSConv(m_encoding).cWC2MB(wxConvISO8859_1.cMB2WC(text));
		4105	}
		4106	}
		4107	}
		4108
		4109	m_editor->InsertText(textCopy.empty() ? text : textCopy,
		4110	MessageEditor::Insert_Append);
4103	}	4111	}
4104		4112
4105	void	4113	void

Lines 3-9 Link Here

(-)mahogany-0.67/src/gui/wxIconManager.cpp (-6 / +13 lines)
3	* *	3	* *
4	* (C) 1997-1999 by Karsten Ballüder (ballueder@gmx.net) *	4	* (C) 1997-1999 by Karsten Ballüder (ballueder@gmx.net) *
5	* *	5	* *
6	* $Id: wxIconManager.cpp,v 1.110 2006/01/16 20:32:27 nerijus Exp $	6	* $Id: wxIconManager.cpp,v 1.112 2006/08/25 16:23:13 vadz Exp $
7	*******************************************************************/	7	*******************************************************************/
8		8
9	// ============================================================================	9	// ============================================================================
Lines 556-568 Link Here
556	return icon;	556	return icon;
557		557
558	// next step: try to load the icon files .png,.xpm,.gif:	558	// next step: try to load the icon files .png,.xpm,.gif:
559	bool found = false;
560	if(m_GlobalDir.Length())	559	if(m_GlobalDir.Length())
561	{	560	{
562	PathFinder pf(READ_APPCONFIG(MP_ICONPATH));	561	PathFinder pf(READ_APPCONFIG(MP_ICONPATH));
563		562
564	#ifdef M_TOP_SOURCEDIR	563	#ifdef M_TOP_SOURCEDIR
		564	// look in the source directory to make it possible to use the program
		565	// without installing it
565	pf.AddPaths(String(M_TOP_SOURCEDIR) + _T("/src/icons"));	566	pf.AddPaths(String(M_TOP_SOURCEDIR) + _T("/src/icons"));
		567	pf.AddPaths(String(M_TOP_SOURCEDIR) + _T("/res"));
566	#endif // M_TOP_SOURCEDIR	568	#endif // M_TOP_SOURCEDIR
567		569
568	pf.AddPaths(m_GlobalDir, false);	570	pf.AddPaths(m_GlobalDir, false);
Lines 580-590 Link Here
580	String name;	582	String name;
581	for ( int ext = 0; wxIconManagerFileExtensions[ext]; ext++ )	583	for ( int ext = 0; wxIconManagerFileExtensions[ext]; ext++ )
582	{	584	{
583	// Use iconNameOrig to preserve captialisation:	585	// use iconNameOrig here to preserve the original case
584	name = iconNameOrig + wxIconManagerFileExtensions[ext];	586	name = pf.FindFile(iconNameOrig + wxIconManagerFileExtensions[ext]);
585	name = pf.FindFile(name, &found);
586		587
587	if( found )	588	// but if it's not found, also fall back to the usual lower case
		589	if ( name.empty() )
		590	{
		591	name = pf.FindFile(iconName + wxIconManagerFileExtensions[ext]);
		592	}
		593
		594	if ( !name.empty() )
588	{	595	{
589	ms_IconPath = name.BeforeLast('/');	596	ms_IconPath = name.BeforeLast('/');
590		597

Lines 6-12 Link Here

(-)mahogany-0.67/src/gui/wxMApp.cpp (-70 / +24 lines)
6	// Author: Karsten Ballüder, Vadim Zeitlin	6	// Author: Karsten Ballüder, Vadim Zeitlin
7	// Modified by:	7	// Modified by:
8	// Created: 1997	8	// Created: 1997
9	// CVS-ID: $Id: wxMApp.cpp,v 1.305 2006/04/19 00:55:04 vadz Exp $	9	// CVS-ID: $Id: wxMApp.cpp,v 1.309 2006/09/02 12:41:30 vadz Exp $
10	// Copyright: (c) 1997-2002 M-Team	10	// Copyright: (c) 1997-2002 M-Team
11	// Licence: M license	11	// Licence: M license
12	///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////	12	///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
Lines 913-920 Link Here
913	bool	913	bool
914	wxMApp::OnInit()	914	wxMApp::OnInit()
915	{	915	{
916	// we want our OnAbnormalTermination() be called if we crash	916	// we want our OnAbnormalTermination() be called if we crash but don't use
917	#if wxUSE_ON_FATAL_EXCEPTION	917	// it in debug builds as it interferes with the debugger
		918	#if wxUSE_ON_FATAL_EXCEPTION && !defined(__WXDEBUG__)
918	wxHandleFatalExceptions();	919	wxHandleFatalExceptions();
919	#endif	920	#endif
920		921
Lines 1101-1106 Link Here
1101	}	1102	}
1102	#endif // USE_I18N	1103	#endif // USE_I18N
1103		1104
		1105	// wxLocale::GetSystemEncoding() is broken in wx <= 2.6.3, it returns
		1106	// ISO-8859-1 for UTF-8 locale
		1107	#if defined(__WXGTK20__) && wxCHECK_VERSION(2, 6, 4)
		1108	// we need UTF-8 support to be able to work with messages in different
		1109	// encodings
		1110	if ( wxLocale::GetSystemEncoding() != wxFONTENCODING_UTF8 )
		1111	{
		1112	// TODO: set encoding to UTF-8 (but keeping the current language)
		1113	// ourselves
		1114	wxLogWarning(_("Your current locale doesn't use UTF-8 encoding!\n"
		1115	"\n"
		1116	"This means that Mahogany will not be able to work "
		1117	"with texts in encodings other than the default one\n"
		1118	"which may result in messages not being displayed or "
		1119	"even sent correctly.\n"
		1120	"\n"
		1121	"Please change the system locale to UTF-8."));
		1122	}
		1123	#endif // GTK+ 2.0
		1124
1104	wxInitAllImageHandlers();	1125	wxInitAllImageHandlers();
1105	wxFileSystem::AddHandler(new wxMemoryFSHandler);	1126	wxFileSystem::AddHandler(new wxMemoryFSHandler);
1106	// wxFileSystem::AddHandler(new wxZipFSHandler); // for zipped docs	1127	// wxFileSystem::AddHandler(new wxZipFSHandler); // for zipped docs
Lines 2503-2575 Link Here
2503	return true;	2524	return true;
2504	}	2525	}
2505		2526
2506	// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
2507	// global functions implemented here
2508	// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
2509
2510	extern bool EnsureAvailableTextEncoding(wxFontEncoding *enc,
2511	wxString *text,
2512	bool mayAskUser)
2513	{
2514	CHECK( enc, false, _T("CheckEncodingAvailability: NULL encoding") );
2515
2516	if ( !wxFontMapper::Get()->IsEncodingAvailable(*enc) )
2517	{
2518	// try to find another encoding
2519	wxFontEncoding encAlt;
2520	if ( wxFontMapper::Get()->
2521	GetAltForEncoding(*enc, &encAlt, wxEmptyString, mayAskUser) )
2522	{
2523	// translate the text (if any) to the equivalent encoding
2524	if ( text && !text->empty() )
2525	{
2526	#if wxUSE_WCHAR_T
2527	// try converting via Unicode
2528	wxCSConv a2w(*enc);
2529	wxWCharBuffer wbuf(a2w.cMB2WC(text->c_str()));
2530	if ( *wbuf )
2531	{
2532	// special case of UTF-8 which is used all the time under wxGTK
2533	if ( encAlt == wxFONTENCODING_UTF8 )
2534	{
2535	*text = wxConvUTF8.cWC2MB(wbuf);
2536	}
2537	else // all the other encodings, use generic converter
2538	{
2539	wxCSConv w2a(encAlt);
2540	*text = w2a.cWC2MB(wbuf);
2541	}
2542
2543	if ( !text->empty() )
2544	return true;
2545	//else: fall back to wxEncodingConverter
2546	}
2547	//else: conversion to Unicode failed
2548	#endif // wxUSE_WCHAR_T
2549
2550	wxEncodingConverter conv;
2551	if ( !conv.Init(*enc, encAlt) )
2552	{
2553	// failed to convert the text
2554	return false;
2555	}
2556
2557	text = conv.Convert(text);
2558	}
2559	//else: just return the encoding
2560
2561	*enc = encAlt;
2562	}
2563	else // no equivalent encoding
2564	{
2565	return false;
2566	}
2567	}
2568
2569	// we have either the requested encoding or an equivalent one
2570	return true;
2571	}
2572
2573	// ============================================================================	2527	// ============================================================================
2574	// IPC and multiple program instances handling	2528	// IPC and multiple program instances handling
2575	// ============================================================================	2529	// ============================================================================

Line 0 Link Here

(-)mahogany-0.67/src/gui/wxMGuiUtils.cpp (+129 lines)
		1	///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
		2	// Project: M - cross platform e-mail GUI client
		3	// File name: gui/wxMGuiUtils.cpp
		4	// Purpose: miscellaneous GUI helpers
		5	// Author: Vadim Zeitlin
		6	// Created: 2006-08-19
		7	// CVS-ID: $Id: wxMGuiUtils.cpp,v 1.1 2006/08/19 13:12:00 vadz Exp $
		8	// Copyright: (c) 2006 Vadim Zeitlin
		9	// Licence: M license
		10	///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
		11
		12	// ============================================================================
		13	// declarations
		14	// ============================================================================
		15
		16	// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
		17	// headers
		18	// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
		19
		20	#include "Mpch.h"
		21
		22	#ifndef USE_PCH
		23	# include "Mcommon.h"
		24	# include "guidef.h"
		25
		26	# include <wx/fontmap.h>
		27	#endif // USE_PCH
		28
		29	#include <wx/encconv.h>
		30
		31	// ============================================================================
		32	// implementation
		33	// ============================================================================
		34
		35	bool
		36	EnsureAvailableTextEncoding(wxFontEncoding enc, wxString text, bool mayAskUser)
		37	{
		38	CHECK( enc, false, _T("CheckEncodingAvailability: NULL encoding") );
		39
		40	if ( !wxFontMapper::Get()->IsEncodingAvailable(*enc) )
		41	{
		42	// try to find another encoding
		43	wxFontEncoding encAlt;
		44	if ( wxFontMapper::Get()->
		45	GetAltForEncoding(*enc, &encAlt, wxEmptyString, mayAskUser) )
		46	{
		47	// translate the text (if any) to the equivalent encoding
		48	if ( text && !text->empty() )
		49	{
		50	#if wxUSE_WCHAR_T
		51	// try converting via Unicode
		52	wxCSConv a2w(*enc);
		53	wxWCharBuffer wbuf(a2w.cMB2WC(text->c_str()));
		54	if ( *wbuf )
		55	{
		56	// special case of UTF-8 which is used all the time under wxGTK
		57	if ( encAlt == wxFONTENCODING_UTF8 )
		58	{
		59	*text = wxConvUTF8.cWC2MB(wbuf);
		60	}
		61	else // all the other encodings, use generic converter
		62	{
		63	wxCSConv w2a(encAlt);
		64	*text = w2a.cWC2MB(wbuf);
65	}
66
67	if ( !text->empty() )
68	return true;
69	//else: fall back to wxEncodingConverter
70	}
71	//else: conversion to Unicode failed
72	#endif // wxUSE_WCHAR_T
73
74	wxEncodingConverter conv;
75	if ( !conv.Init(*enc, encAlt) )
76	{
77	// failed to convert the text
78	return false;
79	}
80
81	text = conv.Convert(text);
82	}
83	//else: just return the encoding
84
85	*enc = encAlt;
86	}
87	else // no equivalent encoding
88	{
89	return false;
90	}
91	}
92
93	// we have either the requested encoding or an equivalent one
94	return true;
95	}
96
97	wxFont
98	CreateFontFromDesc(const String& fontDesc, int fontSize, int fontFamily)
99	{
100	wxFont font;
101
102	// use the native font description if we have it
103	if ( !fontDesc.empty() )
104	{
105	wxNativeFontInfo fontInfo;
106	if ( fontInfo.FromString(fontDesc) )
107	{
108	font.SetNativeFontInfo(fontInfo);
109	}
110	}
111
112	// if we don't, or if creating font from it failed, create the font with the
113	// given size and family if we have [either of] them
114	if ( !font.Ok() && (fontSize != -1 \|\| fontFamily != -1) )
115	{
116	font = wxFont
117	(
118	fontSize == -1 ? wxNORMAL_FONT->GetPointSize()
119	: fontSize,
120	fontFamily == wxFONTFAMILY_DEFAULT ? wxNORMAL_FONT->GetFamily()
121	: fontFamily,
122	wxFONTSTYLE_NORMAL,
123	wxFONTWEIGHT_NORMAL
124	);
125	}
126
127	return font;
128	}
129

Lines 4-10 Link Here

(-)mahogany-0.67/src/gui/wxMSplash.cpp (-4 / +6 lines)
4	// Purpose: splash screen/about dialog implementation	4	// Purpose: splash screen/about dialog implementation
5	// Author: Vadim Zeitlin	5	// Author: Vadim Zeitlin
6	// Created: 2006-06-04 (extracted from wxMDialogs.cpp)	6	// Created: 2006-06-04 (extracted from wxMDialogs.cpp)
7	// CVS-ID: $Id: wxMSplash.cpp,v 1.2 2006/06/04 19:24:54 nerijus Exp $	7	// CVS-ID: $Id: wxMSplash.cpp,v 1.6 2006/08/31 23:09:06 nerijus Exp $
8	// Copyright: (c) 1998-2006 Vadim Zeitlin <vadim@wxwindows.org>	8	// Copyright: (c) 1998-2006 Vadim Zeitlin <vadim@wxwindows.org>
9	// Licence: M license	9	// Licence: M license
10	///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////	10	///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
Lines 174-180 Link Here
174	wxStaticBitmap *top = new wxStaticBitmap(this, wxID_ANY, bmp,	174	wxStaticBitmap *top = new wxStaticBitmap(this, wxID_ANY, bmp,
175	wxPoint(0, 0), sizeBmp);	175	wxPoint(0, 0), sizeBmp);
176	wxHtmlWindow *bottom = new wxHtmlWindow(this, wxID_ANY,	176	wxHtmlWindow *bottom = new wxHtmlWindow(this, wxID_ANY,
177	wxPoint(0, sizeBmp.y + 1), sizeBmp);	177	wxPoint(0, sizeBmp.y + 1), sizeBmp,
		178	wxHW_DEFAULT_STYLE \| wxHW_NO_SELECTION);
178		179
179	ConnectMouseAndKeyEvents(top);	180	ConnectMouseAndKeyEvents(top);
180	ConnectMouseAndKeyEvents(bottom);	181	ConnectMouseAndKeyEvents(bottom);
Lines 219-224 Link Here
219	wxString pageHtmlText;	220	wxString pageHtmlText;
220		221
221	pageHtmlText << _T("<body text=#000000 bgcolor=#ffffff>"	222	pageHtmlText << _T("<body text=#000000 bgcolor=#ffffff>"
		223	"<meta HTTP-EQUIV=\"Content-Type\" CONTENT=\"text/html;charset=UTF-8\">"
222	"<font face=\"Times New Roman,times\">"	224	"<font face=\"Times New Roman,times\">"
223		225
224	"<h4>") << _("Mahogany information") << _T("</h4>")	226	"<h4>") << _("Mahogany information") << _T("</h4>")
Lines 261-268 Link Here
261	<< "<p>"	263	<< "<p>"
262	_T("<h4>") << _("List of contributors:") << _T("</h4>")	264	_T("<h4>") << _("List of contributors:") << _T("</h4>")
263	"<p>"	265	"<p>"
264	"Karsten Ballüder, Vadim Zeitlin, Greg Noel,<br> "	266	"Karsten Ball" "\xC3\xBC" "der, Vadim Zeitlin, Greg Noel,<br>"
265	"Nerijus Baliūnas, Xavier Nodet, Vaclav Slavik,<br>"	267	"Nerijus Bali" "\xC5\xAB" "nas, Xavier Nodet, Vaclav Slavik,<br>"
266	"Daniel Seifert, Michele Ravani, Michael A Chase,<br>"	268	"Daniel Seifert, Michele Ravani, Michael A Chase,<br>"
267	"Robert Vazan " << _("and many others") << "<br>"	269	"Robert Vazan " << _("and many others") << "<br>"
268	"<br>"	270	"<br>"

Lines 5-11 Link Here

(-)mahogany-0.67/src/gui/wxOptionsDlg.cpp (-6 / +1 lines)
5	// Author: Vadim Zeitlin	5	// Author: Vadim Zeitlin
6	// Modified by:	6	// Modified by:
7	// Created: 20.08.98	7	// Created: 20.08.98
8	// CVS-ID: $Id: wxOptionsDlg.cpp,v 1.430 2006/07/31 00:38:47 vadz Exp $	8	// CVS-ID: $Id: wxOptionsDlg.cpp,v 1.431 2006/08/31 23:18:28 vadz Exp $
9	// Copyright: (c) 1998 Vadim Zeitlin <zeitlin@dptmaths.ens-cachan.fr>	9	// Copyright: (c) 1998 Vadim Zeitlin <zeitlin@dptmaths.ens-cachan.fr>
10	// Licence: M license	10	// Licence: M license
11	///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////	11	///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
Lines 2818-2826 Link Here
2818	strValue = strutil_decrypt(strValue);	2818	strValue = strutil_decrypt(strValue);
2819		2819
2820	case Field_Font:	2820	case Field_Font:
2821	strValue = wxFontBrowseButton::FontDescToUser(strValue);
2822	// fall through
2823
2824	case Field_Dir:	2821	case Field_Dir:
2825	case Field_File:	2822	case Field_File:
2826	case Field_Folder:	2823	case Field_Folder:
Lines 2987-2994 Link Here
2987	// post processing is needed for some fields	2984	// post processing is needed for some fields
2988	if ( fieldType == Field_Passwd )	2985	if ( fieldType == Field_Passwd )
2989	strValue = strutil_encrypt(strValue);	2986	strValue = strutil_encrypt(strValue);
2990	else if ( fieldType == Field_Font )
2991	strValue = wxFontBrowseButton::FontDescFromUser(strValue);
2992	else if ( fieldType == Field_Number ) {	2987	else if ( fieldType == Field_Number ) {
2993	wxASSERT( m_aDefaults[n].IsNumeric() );	2988	wxASSERT( m_aDefaults[n].IsNumeric() );
2994		2989

Lines 5-11 Link Here

(-)mahogany-0.67/src/gui/wxTextDialog.cpp (-33 / +38 lines)
5	// Author: Vadim Zeitlin	5	// Author: Vadim Zeitlin
6	// Modified by:	6	// Modified by:
7	// Created: 14.02.03 (extracted from src/gui/wxMDialogs.cpp)	7	// Created: 14.02.03 (extracted from src/gui/wxMDialogs.cpp)
8	// CVS-ID: $Id: wxTextDialog.cpp,v 1.10 2006/01/16 20:32:28 nerijus Exp $	8	// CVS-ID: $Id: wxTextDialog.cpp,v 1.14 2006/08/24 17:58:37 vadz Exp $
9	// Copyright: (c) 2001-2003 Vadim Zeitlin	9	// Copyright: (c) 2001-2003 Vadim Zeitlin
10	// Licence: M licence	10	// Licence: M licence
11	///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////	11	///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
Lines 143-180 Link Here
143		143
144	m_configPath = configPath;	144	m_configPath = configPath;
145		145
146	// we may have or not the location in config where the dialogs position/size
147	// are stored
148	int x, y, w, h;
149	if ( m_configPath )
150	{
151	wxMFrame::RestorePosition(configPath, &x, &y, &w, &h);
152	}
153	else
154	{
155	x =
156	y = -1;
157	w = 500;
158	h = 300;
159	}
160
161	SetSize(x, y, w, h);
162
163	// create controls	146	// create controls
164	// ---------------	147	// ---------------
165		148
166	m_text = new wxTextCtrl(this, -1, wxEmptyString,	149	m_text = new wxTextCtrl(this, -1, wxEmptyString,
167	wxPoint(0, 0),	150	wxDefaultPosition,
168	wxSize(w, h),	151	wxDefaultSize,
169	wxTE_MULTILINE \|	152	wxTE_MULTILINE \|
170	wxTE_READONLY \|	153	wxTE_READONLY \|
171	wxTE_NOHIDESEL \|	154	wxTE_NOHIDESEL \|
172	wxTE_RICH2);	155	wxTE_RICH2);
173	m_text->SetValue(text);
174		156
175	// use fixed-width font	157	// use fixed-width font and latin1 encoding in which all text is valid:
176	m_text->SetFont(wxFont(12, wxFONTFAMILY_TELETYPE,	158	// without encoding information (which wouldn't make sense anyhow as we can
177	wxFONTSTYLE_NORMAL, wxFONTWEIGHT_NORMAL));	159	// have multiple parts using different encodings) we must do this to at
		160	// least show something to the user while using the default UTF-8 encoding
		161	// of GTK+ 2 could result in nothing being shown at all
		162	m_text->SetFont(wxFont(wxNORMAL_FONT->GetPointSize(), wxFONTFAMILY_TELETYPE,
		163	wxFONTSTYLE_NORMAL, wxFONTWEIGHT_NORMAL,
		164	false /* not underlined */, wxEmptyString,
		165	wxFONTENCODING_ISO8859_1));
		166
		167	// now that the encoding is set, we can show the text
		168	m_text->SetValue(text);
178		169
179	// in TAB order we want "Save" to get focus before "Close", so create	170	// in TAB order we want "Save" to get focus before "Close", so create
180	// them in order	171	// them in order
Lines 196-215 Link Here
196	sizerTop->Add(m_text, 1, wxEXPAND);	187	sizerTop->Add(m_text, 1, wxEXPAND);
197	sizerTop->Add(sizerBtns, 0, wxCENTRE \| wxTOP \| wxBOTTOM, LAYOUT_Y_MARGIN);	188	sizerTop->Add(sizerBtns, 0, wxCENTRE \| wxTOP \| wxBOTTOM, LAYOUT_Y_MARGIN);
198		189
199	// set the sizer &c
200	// ----------------
201
202	SetSizer(sizerTop);	190	SetSizer(sizerTop);
203	SetAutoLayout(TRUE);
204		191
205	// FIXME: bug in wxMSW? without Layout() the buttons are not positioned	192	// final initialization
206	// correctly initially	193	// --------------------
207	#ifdef __WXMSW__
208	Layout();
209	#endif
210		194
211	m_text->SetFocus();	195	m_text->SetFocus();
212		196
		197	// under wxGTK SetFocus() scrolls the control to the bottom for some reason
		198	// while we always want to show the top of the message
		199	m_text->SetInsertionPoint(0);
		200
		201	// we may have or not the location in config where the dialogs position/size
		202	// are stored
		203	int x, y, w, h;
		204	if ( m_configPath )
		205	{
		206	wxMFrame::RestorePosition(configPath, &x, &y, &w, &h);
		207	}
		208	else
		209	{
		210	x =
		211	y = -1;
		212	w = 500;
		213	h = 300;
		214	}
		215
		216	SetSize(x, y, w, h);
		217
213	Show(TRUE);	218	Show(TRUE);
214	}	219	}
215		220

Lines 6-12 Link Here

(-)mahogany-0.67/src/modules/HtmlViewer.cpp (-12 / +15 lines)
6	// Author: Vadim Zeitlin	6	// Author: Vadim Zeitlin
7	// Modified by:	7	// Modified by:
8	// Created: 26.07.01	8	// Created: 26.07.01
9	// CVS-ID: $Id: HtmlViewer.cpp,v 1.77 2006/06/27 00:35:07 vadz Exp $	9	// CVS-ID: $Id: HtmlViewer.cpp,v 1.78 2006/08/19 13:12:00 vadz Exp $
10	// Copyright: (c) 2001 Vadim Zeitlin	10	// Copyright: (c) 2001 Vadim Zeitlin
11	// Licence: M license	11	// Licence: M license
12	///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////	12	///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
Lines 140-147 Link Here
140	// add "attr=#colour" attribute to m_htmlText if col is valid	140	// add "attr=#colour" attribute to m_htmlText if col is valid
141	void AddColourAttr(const wxChar *attr, const wxColour& col);	141	void AddColourAttr(const wxChar *attr, const wxColour& col);
142		142
143	// calculate font size	143	// calculate HTML font size for the given font
144	int CalculateFontSize(int diff);	144	int CalculateFontSize(const wxFont& font);
145		145
146	// get the name of the virtual file for the n-th image we use	146	// get the name of the virtual file for the n-th image we use
147	wxString GetVirtualFileName(size_t n) const;	147	wxString GetVirtualFileName(size_t n) const;
Lines 844-855 Link Here
844	}	844	}
845	}	845	}
846		846
847	int HtmlViewer::CalculateFontSize(int diff)	847	int HtmlViewer::CalculateFontSize(const wxFont& font)
848	{	848	{
		849	if ( !font.Ok() )
		850	{
		851	// use default size
		852	return 0;
		853	}
		854
849	// map the point size into the HTML font size so that if the standard font	855	// map the point size into the HTML font size so that if the standard font
850	// size is 12pt, 6pt is very small and 24pt is very big	856	// size is 12pt, 6pt is very small and 24pt is very big
851	//	857	//
852	// this is not very rigorous, of course...	858	// this is not very rigorous, of course...
		859	int diff = font.GetPointSize() - wxNORMAL_FONT->GetPointSize();
853	if ( diff > 0 )	860	if ( diff > 0 )
854	diff /= 4;	861	diff /= 4;
855	else	862	else
Lines 901-909 Link Here
901	// close <body> tag	908	// close <body> tag
902	m_htmlText += _T(">");	909	m_htmlText += _T(">");
903		910
904	wxFont font = profileValues.GetFont();	911	wxFont font(profileValues.GetFont());
905		912	int diff = CalculateFontSize(font);
906	int diff = CalculateFontSize(font.GetPointSize() - DEFAULT_FONT_SIZE);
907	if ( diff )	913	if ( diff )
908	{	914	{
909	m_htmlText << _T("<font size=") << wxString::Format(_T("%+d"), diff) << _T(">");	915	m_htmlText << _T("<font size=") << wxString::Format(_T("%+d"), diff) << _T(">");
Lines 913-919 Link Here
913	// map the font family into HTML font face name	919	// map the font family into HTML font face name
914	//	920	//
915	// TODO: use <font face="...">	921	// TODO: use <font face="...">
916	if ( font.IsFixedWidth() )	922	if ( font.Ok() && font.IsFixedWidth() )
917	{	923	{
918	m_htmlText << _T("<tt>");	924	m_htmlText << _T("<tt>");
919	m_htmlEnd.Prepend(_T("</tt>"));	925	m_htmlEnd.Prepend(_T("</tt>"));
Lines 925-934 Link Here
925		931
926	void HtmlViewer::ShowRawHeaders(const String& header)	932	void HtmlViewer::ShowRawHeaders(const String& header)
927	{	933	{
928	const ProfileValues& profileValues = GetOptions();	934	int diff = CalculateFontSize(GetOptions().GetFont());
929	wxFont font = profileValues.GetFont();
930
931	int diff = CalculateFontSize(font.GetPointSize() - DEFAULT_FONT_SIZE);
932	m_htmlText << _T("<pre>") << _T("<font size=") << wxString::Format(_T("%+d"), diff) << _T(">")	935	m_htmlText << _T("<pre>") << _T("<font size=") << wxString::Format(_T("%+d"), diff) << _T(">")
933	<< MakeHtmlSafe(header) << _T("</font>") << _T("</pre>");	936	<< MakeHtmlSafe(header) << _T("</font>") << _T("</pre>");
934	}	937	}

Lines 5-11 Link Here

(-)mahogany-0.67/src/modules/spam/HeadersFilter.cpp (-2 / +2 lines)
5	// Author: Vadim Zeitlin	5	// Author: Vadim Zeitlin
6	// Modified by:	6	// Modified by:
7	// Created: 2004-07-10 (mostly extracted from Filters.cpp)	7	// Created: 2004-07-10 (mostly extracted from Filters.cpp)
8	// CVS-ID: $Id: HeadersFilter.cpp,v 1.15 2006/06/25 14:36:07 vadz Exp $	8	// CVS-ID: $Id: HeadersFilter.cpp,v 1.16 2006/08/25 10:47:57 vadz Exp $
9	// Copyright: (c) 2004 Vadim Zeitlin <vadim@wxwindows.org>	9	// Copyright: (c) 2004 Vadim Zeitlin <vadim@wxwindows.org>
10	// Licence: M licence	10	// Licence: M licence
11	///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////	11	///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
Lines 70-79 Link Here
70	Spam_Test_HTML,	70	Spam_Test_HTML,
71	Spam_Test_BadMIME,	71	Spam_Test_BadMIME,
72	Spam_Test_ExeAttachment,	72	Spam_Test_ExeAttachment,
73	Spam_Test_WhiteList,
74	#ifdef USE_RBL	73	#ifdef USE_RBL
75	Spam_Test_RBL,	74	Spam_Test_RBL,
76	#endif // USE_RBL	75	#endif // USE_RBL
		76	Spam_Test_WhiteList,
77		77
78	Spam_Test_Max	78	Spam_Test_Max
79	};	79	};